ALSO BY PAUL SELIG
I Am the Word The Book of Love and Creation The Book of Knowing and Worth
JEREMY P. TARCHER/PENGUIN An imprint of Penguin Random House LLC 375 Hudson Street New York, New York 10014 Copyright © 2016 by Paul Selig Foreword copyright © 2016 by Jeffery J. Kripal Penguin supports copyright. Copyright fuels creativity, encourages diverse voices, promotes free speech, and creates a vibrant culture. Thank you for buying an authorized edition of this book and for complying with copyright laws by not reproducing, scanning, or distributing any part of it in any form without permission. You are supporting writers and allowing Penguin to continue to publish books for every reader. Most Tarcher/Penguin books are available at special quantity discounts for bulk purchase for sales promotions, premiums, fund-raising, and educational needs. Special books or book excerpts also can be created to fit specific needs. For details, write: SpecialMarkets@penguinrandomhouse.com. eBook ISBN: 978-0-698-40425-0 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Names: Selig, Paul, author. Title: The book of mastery : a channeled text / Paul Selig. Description: New York : Jeremy P. Tarcher, 2016. Identifiers: LCCN 2015036217 | ISBN 9780399175701 Subjects: LCSH: Spirit writings. | Self-actualization (Psychology)—Miscellanea. Classification: LCC BF1290 .S38 2016 | DDC 133.9/3—dc23 LC record available at http://lccn.loc.gov/2015036217 Cover design by Nita Ybarra Version_1
CONTENTS
Also by Paul Selig Title Page Copyright FOREWORD Receive the Hero by Jeffrey J. Kripal
Introduction PART ONE
INTRODUCTION TO THE MOUNTAIN CHAPTER ONE Identity and Claim CHAPTER TWO I Am Here CHAPTER THREE Union CHAPTER FOUR I See with the Eyes of the Christ
PART TWO
THE MOUNTAIN BEFORE YOU CHAPTER FIVE The Welcoming of the New CHAPTER SIX Up the Mountain CHAPTER SEVEN Being in Truth CHAPTER EIGHT Freedom and Responsibility
CHAPTER NINE Re-creation of the Self
PART THREE
THE HEIGHTS CHAPTER TEN The Reclamation of Innocence CHAPTER ELEVEN The Mountaintop
Epilogue Acknowledgments About the Author
FOREWORD
RECEIVE THE HERO
R
eceive the hero.” The phrase is an invocation of energies into the human form commonly used by the Guides in the channeled work of Paul Selig. I remember well the first time I heard it. It was April of 2009, and I was visiting Paul in his apartment on Eighth Avenue in New York City at the recommendation of my friend Victoria Nelson. Victoria had just read the manuscript of my book, Authors of the Impossible, which is about how paranormal experiences are often structured like stories, and how these extraordinary events point to the paranormal potentials of language, of reading and writing. Victoria was working with Paul that spring on what would become I Am the Word, and she was seeing all sorts of connections between what I was writing and what was manifesting between the two of them over the phone between New York City and Berkeley. “You need to meet Paul, Jeff.” I took Victoria’s advice seriously. I contacted Paul the next time I was lecturing at Columbia University, and the two of us met. I happened to be exploring the various comic book stores of the city on the same trip as part of my research for a book I was writing on the paranormal experiences of sci-fi and comic book artists and authors. When I sat down with Paul to meet the Guides and was told to “Receive the hero,” the phrase hit me on a number of levels. That caught my ear. But that was just the beginning. Paul also “read” my wife, whose facial features he eerily somatized before me. He had never met her, never seen her, and yet here he was, “becoming Julie.” That caught my eye. He also, I must observe now from 2015, read aspects of my own future, which have since come to be. That has caught my mind.
Most of all, though, Paul has caught my heart. He is a gentle, funny, shy, sophisticated, but finally humble man who channels an extraordinary message— that we are always a Divine Being, a Christ, an Incarnated Self who also exists outside of space and time; that everything is God; that our small selves are not who we really are, despite everything we have come to believe or think from our specific religious, cultural, and familial histories. There is no inflation of Paul’s own ego here. Paul only claims to be the channel of this message. He remains a small self all the while, questioning the message, getting more than a little nervous about its implications, occasionally even “freaking out,” as he often says. Still, it is not quite true that Paul is only the channel. As I write this foreword, I have just finished teaching a month-long workshop with Paul at the Esalen Institute in Big Sur, California. He sent the manuscript of The Book of Mastery to press while we were here, while I read it each morning. Here, in Big Sur, I have seen up close and many times what this new book calls the master manifest through him. I have seen the master work, lovingly and powerfully, with dozens of individuals, “becoming” their significant others, as he did with my own wife, and “stepping into” their own conscious and unconscious selves in order to “read” their emotional and spiritual complexes in uncanny, seemingly telepathic ways. To the extent that he manifests the master in these moments, Paul demonstrates the central teaching of the Guides about mastery: that we have yet to claim who we really are, what we really are, and how we can truly serve. This is the message of the present book, the fourth in a growing series of channeled teachings. “To be a master,” we are told, means “to change matter through your own conscious manifestation and expression.” This is done through a new personal “alignment” with the higher dimensions of the self “up the mountain” and a particular kind of “out-picturing,” which we might reframe as a kind of Divine imagination whose spiritual and material manifestations are anything but imaginary. Such mastery is not accomplished at the level of the personality. Again, it is not about divinizing or inflating the ego. It is done at the level of the Divine Self and its “union with all.” Although I recognize this teaching as a modern reflection and refraction of countless similar teachings in the history of comparative mystical literature, I will make no pretense about fully understanding it, much less explaining it. That is the work of the book and its coded energies, its own paranormal powers of language, if you will. But I do understand now why Victoria wanted me to meet
Paul six years ago. He and the Guides are authors of the impossible. They authorize the impossible as possible. As us. JEFFREY J. KRIPAL
Big Sur, California 7 June 2015
T
he following are transcripts of channeling sessions conducted in New York City between January 11, 2015, and March 12, 2015. Paul Selig served as channel. Victoria Nelson was present via telephone from Berkeley, California. Several sessions were delivered during live-streamed seminars, and selected questions from these sessions have been included.
INTRODUCTION Day One
W
e will ask questions now to you and Victoria about what is to come. Is the willingness there to prepare yourselves for a new life? Because the text that is going to come through, and come through very quickly, is in preparation for a new life for you and for those who read it. You cannot be exempt from the teachings that come through because as you are the vessel, Paul, for the exchange with the reader, Victoria is the audience who is participatory to the teachings as they come. So both of you are, in part, engaged in a process that will continue for a lifetime after this text is finished. We have issues for you to contend with as we congratulate you, and all of you, in advance for the work on this text. This is the most important text of the three we have delivered so far,* and as we move beyond the third to this text we say “yes” to the reader who has said, “I am here.” “I am here as I am, in my knowing, to congratulate myself for the life that I will live.” The exchange of energy that happens here through this text will be the highest so far, and those who are attending to it must be prepared to withstand the changes that will come. This is not about convenience. This is not a convenient text to the personality self and the creations of the personality—those things you see before you that you identify yourselves as and through—because many of the things that you create in order to know yourself on this plane were prepared by you in a biased way to attend to the teachings that you have inherited for a millennium. Now the times have changed and the teachings must change as well. The preparation for this will come in several chapters because we must lay a foundation for each of you, each of you who attends to these teachings, to climb
the mountain that is going to be before you. You don’t like to climb, you see. You want somebody to lift you by the scruff of the neck and place you at the top of the mountain. You want to be told that you are there already and you have no other work to do. We will tell you this: If you wish to climb the mountain, you will be met by us every step of the way. We do not leave our students behind. But what we will not do is pretend to carry you up the slope when you want to be sitting at the base doing what you’ve always done, which is to decide for yourselves that it cannot be done, will not be done, and, therefore, why bother. “They will do it for me,” you say. “The teachers will do it for me.” In fact, we will support you but we cannot do your work for you. “What is the work?” Paul is asking. The work is mastery, and this is the text of mastery, and what mastery means is that you can no longer blame another for your own lives, for your own dilemmas, for your own physical self, for your own creations. It means you claim purview of every avenue of your life and you walk the boulevard that is before you as the Divine One you are. Without action this text means nothing, and we will explain what that means: When you have a teaching that implies you have work to do, the work is not just the eyes on the page, the work is what happens when you attend to the teachings and put them in action in your lives. And what you must understand, each of you who reads this text, is that the assignments that you will be given will come in the form of your lives. Your life before you becomes your teacher and the opportunities to learn are put before you sequentially so that you may attend to your own consciousness as the master that you are. We do not placate you. We do not tell you you are fine, or that you are done, or you should go play in the pond and smell the flowers. There are times for that, yes, but there are also times for action. And to become the master of your own life has several tenets that are required by the reader. The first and foremost is, “I Am Here.” The Divine Self as you who already knows her name, “I Am,” is here, can only be here, can never be anywhere else but where you are. And the Divine Self as you who comes forward in this test of your own availability to see yourself as the master of your life will come to you with the answers you require. But as we teach you—and the teaching, “I Am Here,” will be paramount to this class—you must understand that the one you are who knows her name, the Divine Self as you, will be calling you forward.
The second thing we wish you to know is that you must not suffer. This is not a text of suffering, and those of you who would like to take this text and use it to harm yourselves—“I can’t do it right,” “I will never understand it,” “It cannot be so,” “I must be foolish”—should put the book down now and come back to it when you have a good sense of humor, because you’re going to need it. The life that you live, the life that you express through, has taken many forms and the creations you take so seriously, “Oh, look at the mess I made,” “Oh, look at that thing over there, what am I to do, what am I to do?” are actually only as great as you perceive them to be. And the mountains out of molehills, we will say, must be reduced to the level of sand that they come from so that you may walk upon them and claim your true destiny as the master that you are. The final thing we wish you to know, and all of you to know, is that you are not alone in this teaching. Each one of you who attends to these words is being ushered through this process by us, the Guides who work with Paul, yes, but those that we have assigned to you to support you in your process, and those who attend to the text will be attending to one another as well on the higher levels of frequency that you now exist in. If you can imagine that there is a parade of awakening souls walking down each boulevard, you will see that you are not alone. And if you raise your hand in expectancy of assistance, you might as well accept that it will be there, if not by us, then one of your fellows. We will say this to you: The ideals that you hold and have held thus far as the being that you are are going to be challenged, and the aspects of you that are very moored to the things you’ve made, the identity you’ve claimed, the way you’ve decided you should be, will be addressed sequentially by the teachings of this text. And by “sequentially” we mean we are taking you through a journey where those aspects of yourselves that you have claimed as you will be seen, will be witnessed, will be comprehended by the self who wishes to release herself from those creations. “Who is the True Self?” Paul is asking. “Which self are you speaking to, the Divine Self or the Christed Self, or the false self?” We will not say there is a false self, but we will say there is a personality, an identity that you have used to navigate a life that supports you in some ways, but has a deep investment in denying the truth of who she is, and she does this only for one reason: to protect her status as the ruler of the kingdom she sees before her. You all live in a kingdom, you see, and the kingdom you see before you is what you have attended to thus far as a cocreator of your life. Those aspects of you that you’ve decided should be pronounced have been pronounced, have
called things into being, and you walk about your lives saying, “Look at me, this is who I am, this is how I am known, this is what I have achieved.” Now the small self, or the personality self, knows herself through these things and counts on the landscape to identify through her, to see herself as the magistrate of all of her creations, “I made this thing, it is here,” “I decided that thing, it came to be,” but the who that decides and the who that chooses is the aspect of the self that was taught to believe, or create, in certain ways. The Divine Self, or the Christed Self, or the Divine Truth of who you are, who seeks its expression through you, will claim something vastly different when she knows who she truly is in exchange with the things she sees before her. When you decide in advance what something should be, the aspect of you who is deciding is the aspect of the self that was taught certain things: This is what it means to be successful, to be happy, to be lived a life in happiness. Well, we will say this to you: While there may be merit in some of those teachings, they were created by others and you simply attend to them as if they are the truth, and you look at your landscape and you measure your worth, or your achievement, or your happiness by the creations you have made. This is presumptive, on your part, that you should be achieved, or be happy, or in congruence with society’s needs for what these things should be, or mean, or look like. We will ask you this: If there were never any laws, would mankind have gone wild? Were that there were never any status, would one have risen above the other, would things be valued in the ways that they are? If there was never any death, would you all be running around in your lives as if this is the last piece of bread you would ever be given or the last sunset you would see? We will tell you this: The world that you know, that you have created and cocreated with your fellows, is a construct. A construct is a creation, a manifestation of consciousness made into form, and that is the kingdom you know yourself through. It is a shared creation. You and your brothers, you and your sisters, are all party to these creations. What will happen through the reading of this text is that the landscape you live in will be transformed because you will begin to exist in the higher octave that we call the Kingdom of the Christ or, if you wish, the Divine Self in her manifestation in all she sees before her. Paul wants to run for the hills with this one. “Don’t make such promises. We have been betrayed too many times. Don’t tell us we will be loved, or that we will be realized, or that we will know ourselves in prosperity if it is not so.”
Here we will tell you the truth: You have always been loved, you have always been prospered, and your belief in happiness is based on expectations of who and what you should be and happiness should look like. Consequently, it is a fabrication. You believe that your contentment is the product of being realized, and that is not the case. The product of being realized is knowing who you are, and the being of that, which is manifested as and through you, is what calls the Kingdom into being. You understand this, yes? The Divine as you has the eyes to see the Kingdom. It is always here, has always been present, but you can only perceive with the eyes that may know it. How you attend to this, how you come to this place of being, of realization, is the teaching you will be receiving here, and the names you are given by yourselves will be taken from you so that you may claim your True Self: “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here. I am here. I am here.” Now as we teach you in this class, you will be given assignments and the expectation is you will take the few moments that is required to complete them before going on to the next one. As you read the text, the text itself will be working on you because you have a brigade of beings attending to the needs of the reader as she reads. The action of the text is to keep you awake once you are awake, and as you are awake, the eyes in your head, the consciousness you hold that can perceive, will begin to perceive a world that is very different than the world that you have been taught to live in. Paul is asking, “Is this a different world, or are we only seeing the world differently?” In fact, they are the same thing. What you see in higher dimension always exists, has always been here, but you have not the eyes to see it. If you can imagine a strange light that illumines things in the vibratory field that have always been there, you will understand what we are teaching you. We are shedding a light on those aspects of yourself that, in some ways, serve to preclude you from the entry to the Kingdom that you choose to exist in when you know who you are. Paul is saying, “Why the word ‘choose’? Why wouldn’t we choose this?” We will explain this to you: You all have free will. Everything is gifted to you, but you must choose to attend to it. We will not tell you anything that you should
or must do. We will encourage you in certain ways, yes, we will say “thank you” many times for your endeavors, but we will not tell you who you should be. We will tell you who you are and, like it or not, you are all Divine Beings. You cannot be anything but. But the eyes that you see through have become so glazed over by the things of this world, by what you have been taught to seek out, that you cannot lift them to the mountain that you will climb, and from the crest of the mountain the world that you see before you will be vastly different. The Kingdom, you see, is always here, but you must rise to the level of frequency where you can attend to it. It exists in the lower frequency but cannot be known there. You must rise to meet it. Now as we teach you in this class, we will take the questions of the readers that are given to us in the ethers or in present time and, as we attend to the questions, we will clarify the teachings for those who require clarification. For those of you who don’t require it, we will ask for your patience. We attend to the students of this text, each one of you, at the level of consciousness that you have attended to thus far and, consequently, this is one great big classroom and each one of you is being attended to at the level of comprehension that is appropriate to you. This is not a bad thing. It simply means that it’s a wonderful classroom with many different kinds of teachers attending to the learning needs of many, many students. And as you learn, you show the ones around you that it can be done, it may be known, and you may celebrate one another for the actions you take. “What are the actions you take?” Paul is asking. “What do we do with this teaching?” This is the teaching that will change your world, and it will change your world in manifestation, not just in ideology. This is the first of three texts. This is the teaching of mastery and it is fundamental to the texts that will follow. Paul is getting in the way. “But what about the three texts you did already?” They were preparatory, and foundational for the work that is to commence. So many of you need these texts to fill your individual needs, and while we are happy to support you in this, the real work of the texts has and has always been the ascension of mankind, or, if you wish to say, the realization of mankind to her true Divine Nature. And this is not done to make you feel better. It is not done to make you happy. It is done to show you who you are and who you have always been so that your True World, the Divine World before you, may become a reflection of this truth.
Now we will say this to you: We will encourage you to read the first three texts prior to embarking on this one, but we will also say it is not a requirement. As we have said, the beginning of this text will be to reframe our prior teachings and call you forward so that you may all attend to the journey up the mountain that we have prepared for you. This will not be a limited teaching, and those of you who know our work well will learn new things, but we must escort each of you, each and every reader, to the base of the mountain so that you all may climb together, and some of you need some information, or instruction, or some agreements to what may be so before you can even imagine making this climb. This is the teaching of mastery and we will call it The Book of Mastery because those who wish to publish the book would like that to be the title. But we call it The Teaching of Mastery, and a teaching, we say, that will be an eternal one. And what we mean by this is very simple: When something is true, it is always true. And you must understand this: When something is true, at its essence, it will live a long life, it will be an eternal teaching, it cannot be otherwise. So, however you wish to frame this teaching, in whatever language you choose, you must know that it has always been here, will always be, and will always be operable whenever you return to it, at whatever year, or decade, or century. We are actually distilling, in some ways, a teaching that was known by us a very long time ago in a way that you may comprehend. Paul is getting in the way. “Why? Why? Why? If this was an old teaching, why is it coming through now? Did it not work the first time?” The teaching that you are receiving now in mastery is not a new teaching, but you could not comprehend it at the time it was given first, which would go back prior to what you could even conceive of in linear time. Mankind was not in a place of comprehension, and the limitation and distortion that was overlaid upon it, which has become the world’s religions in a tampered-with way, will support your understanding. What we are actually doing is pulling away the cloth, and the residue, and the debris that has covered the truth so that you may know the truth as it has always been; the language that we use to teach you with we believe to be the language that will support you the most. Now we will say this to you if you are new to our texts: The operable word with each of our texts is “frequency,” and the frequency that you hold is, in fact, your emanation and your consciousness in vibration, the operable word being “frequency.”
Now we teach you in frequency as well, which means the language that we use is informed with vibration that will work with the reader to attune her to the tenets and the vibratory field of the action of this text. And the action of this text, as we have said, is to lead you up the mountain and claim your mastery. We thank you each now for your attention to us. We thank you each now for your willingness to be, and as we continue with this text, we will instruct you as we are allowed. We will ask Paul to show up on a regular basis for these sittings and the recordings that ensue. We will honor Victoria for her presence, once again, as the student and the listener to these words. And we will thank each of you, each one of you, who encounters this text, for your participation in the creation of a wonderful new world. We are blessed to know you. We are your teachers. We go in peace. Thank you and stop now. Period, period, period.
PART ONE
INTRODUCTION TO THE MOUNTAIN
CHAPTER ONE
IDENTITY AND CLAIM Day Two
W
e will ask you questions now about what it means to be yourself and how you identify yourself in the world that you live in. “I walk down the street. I see myself in everything I see. I witness my reflection in everyone I meet.” This is a new concept for many of you, but as you have inherited much information about what it means to be in this world, you presume things. You see what you see, and you interpret it based on what you were taught. So, consequently, all that you see and interpret is through the vision of the one who knows herself through data, through individuation of consciousness that you have inherited. Now we will explain this for Paul, who is already resisting the teaching. As a man, you have expectations about what it means to be a man, and as you live your life you encounter yourself through these expectations. Consequently, all that you see and all that you witness is informed by a sense of self that was made in conceit and in shared agreement, yes, by those who came before you. So the consequence of this is, very, very simply, that when you walk down the street all that you see is actually bound to a history, a consequence, of others’ thought and prescription. Now as you know yourself in a new way, “I am the one I say I am,” “I am the man who says this or that,” you encounter yourself differently. As you individuate as a conscious being and you claim yourself as a self in the world, the purview of the self is to decide what things mean, the importance things have. The way you understand yourself, in many ways, is decided by you in ways you are not aware of. The vibration you hold, in certain ways, has
conducted this. Your fears tell you one thing and your vibration moves into accord with fear and, consequently, what you see will be informed by what you are frightened of. You are informed by many things, and the challenge you face today, as we instruct you, is that you have already decided many things for many reasons about who and what you are, and the unlearning of this, the decoding of this, if you wish, in your own field is what we must attend to to call you forward as the being that you are. Now the being that you are, the True Being that you are, has no history. She is an Infinite Self. She understands who and what she is in a higher way that is not informed by a crisis you had when you were two, or what your husband said about you last week. The Divine Self, or the True Self, if you wish, which will be claimed by you through this text, is actually an infinite being, and all of the things that you would see that would soil you, that would tamper with who you are or disfigure you, are actually not real. They are things that you have invested in and decided were so and, as you walk down the street, the world you see concurs with what you think should be there. Now this is not an abstract teaching and we say this for Paul, who is already concerned for the reader. “What are you talking about? Will they understand what you are talking about? I barely understand what you are saying.� We will do it again: The teaching that we are giving you now is extraordinarily simple, but you must understand that until you can perceive of the fact that the True Self that you are, the infinite Divine Self that you are, holds no history and sense of consequence, you will not understand that the Divine Being that you are cannot be tampered with. Whatever happened to you when you were a child, or ten lifetimes ago, whatever your therapist told you was wrong may, in fact, be something you contend with in your consciousness, but it is not real. It is a parable, in many ways, of the son who leaves the Creator, invests in things, is betrayed by the world, and then comes back to the Divine Self, the True Self, the Christed Self, if you wish, who knows who she is. And all of the residue, all of the mud from the tough journey is cleared from the self once he reencounters himself as the Divine Being he is. You see, what you have done is mistake yourself for your history. You have mistaken yourself through what happened to you. You identify as yourself through the things you see in the world, the objectification of family, of life, as
the things that make you who you are. In fact, the life you live is much greater than this, but as long as you hold the short view, the small view, you will be very challenged with the teaching we are going to give you now. Here is the teaching we are going to give you now: Nothing is real. It is not real. Everything you see before you is a creation of consciousness. Your own consciousness, yes, but the consciousness of all that have come before you in shared agreement about what things should be; and, consequently, you have all invested in a shared creation and built identities that operate in shared agreement—what it means to be a man, what it means to be a woman, what it means to be a father, or a judge, or a criminal, or anything else. These are all subjective, in many ways, but when a shared construct becomes responded to by many and takes form, you will see it as a thing, as a real thing that cannot be changed. To the extent that you invest in your reality—meaning those things you see before you as solid, as immovable—you will be bound to them. Now how do you move away from a self-identification based on what you see before you? And Paul is asking, “If our lives are the reflection of our consciousness, where else do we look?” Well, we are not saying, “Don’t look at your lives.” What we are saying is that the lives you live when you lift above what you see will be witnessed by you in a vastly different way. What you call a calamity today you may call a lesson tomorrow and five years from now you may call a gift. But you cannot see the whole picture when you are looking at “things,” the fundamental things that you see before you, that you believe to be immovable. Now what we are teaching you is actually very simple. But so simple, in fact, that finding the language to carry you through this teaching may be something of a challenge. If you are standing on a walkway and a car goes by, you assume that is a road. If five of you are standing there and a car goes by, you all may agree that this is a road and you may build shops on the sides, and houses, and plant trees and now you have a thoroughfare, because somebody once decided that this was a road. When you move away the car, you have land. Anything can happen there. The landscape, in many ways, was decided by you because one person saw a car. What we are teaching you now is to live the life that is yours to live without the objectification of the self in consort with all of your creations. Yes, you may have a child, you may be a mother, you may know yourself as a mother with a child, but if you believe that is all you are, you are limiting yourself. Your purview, what you see before you, will be informed only by the self of
motherhood, “I am the woman who has the child.” When you move beyond that sense of self and you incorporate other aspects of the self, “I am the woman with the child who is a teacher, who likes clay, and molding clay.” “I am the woman who likes bridge and likes to bake,” or “likes to run,” you are including other aspects of the self, based on what you see and what your preferences are. There is nothing wrong with this, but, in fact, what you are is so much greater than any of these things that you discount the truth of who you are and you attend only to the things that you may see in manifestation before you. Now we would like to talk to Paul for a moment, who is in the corner despairing. “I don’t understand this teaching. If I don’t understand it, neither will the reader.” We are teaching very well, and a very simple teaching in identity, and that may be the chapter, yes, if we decide it will be, “Identity and Claim.” We will say this to you: As you claim yourself in this very moment, “I am the one who is worried,” you may call into your field all of those things and possible outcomes that will agree with your worry. You have that much power. When you move beyond the limited sense of self, “I am the man who knows what he is,” you move beyond the small self. Now the man who knows who he is or the woman who knows who she is is not binding herself to her creations—those things she sees in the world before her that she has imprinted her consciousness on—“This means that, because once upon a time I was told what this means.” The woman who knows who she is, while she may have access to all that information, knows who she is beyond the limited self and, consequently, her purview, what she sees before her, will be blessed by the awareness of her own truth. Now the truth of who each of you are, as we have said in prior texts, is the Divine Self, the Christed Self, if you wish. And the definition we use of Christ and have used before is that the Christ is the aspect of the Creator that may be realized in material form, as and through you. The reidentification of the self, beyond the small claims, has been our work with you in prior texts, and the realization of this, moving beyond the structures that you have all attended to that keep you in obeyance to your lives on the physical plane, we say will be addressed through this teaching. How you know yourself in your life is dependent upon several things: who you say you are, what you agree to, and what you have been taught. The violation of the self that you are all contending with now is that you have been taught to believe that you should be frightened of who you truly are, that you
have no right to claim your own divinity and to realize it in fullness, and the world that is around you will not support you if you attempt to lift beyond the structures that you have all agreed to. What we would like you to know now is that this fear was put in place to keep you in obeyance to the laws of man. And the laws of man, as you understand them, are actually things that have been set in place to keep you in a sense of separation. Paul is asking, “What do you mean, ‘laws of man’?” The laws of man, as you understand them, are that you exist in a physical realm without access to the Divine, that you must be supplicatory to the judge, to the master, to the ones who tell you what you can and cannot be. And the agreements that have been made throughout time to keep man small are being attended to now. The truth of who you are and have always been is far greater than anything that you may know and, until you know who you are above and beyond the structures of man, the creations of man, and the laws of man, you will not be able to see what you are and know yourself in accordance with your Divine worth. What is the process to know? How does mankind know who and what she is beyond what she has seen prior? By claiming the True Self and moving into accord with it. As we have taught you before, there is a system of alignment to the energy field and consciousness you hold to the vibration of the Word. As we claim it, the Word is the energy of the Creator in action. You will say these words now: “I am Word through my body, Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration, Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word, Word, I am Word.” When you claim these things, you align the systems that you hold, the physical body, the auric field, the claim of identity as the True Self. And, as you anchor this frequency into you, “I am Word,” your life will begin to unfold in accordance with this claim. When you claim, “I am Word through my body,” you set the intention that the physical self that you stand in is in agreement and alignment with the frequency of the Word, which, as we have said, is the energy of the Creator in action. “I am Word through my vibration” sets the intention that the field that you hold is in
operational accord with the frequency of the Word, the energy of the Creator in action. When you claim, “I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word,” you are claiming your true identity. The conscious self is reframing herself to be in alignment with her own divinity. You cannot be anything other than what you are. And what you are in truth, what each of you are in truth, is an aspect of the Creator manifested in form, and the knowing of this will begin to transform you and all that you see. The violation of the self that we are attending to now is the discounting of this, which in many ways is heresy. To deny the self her own True Self, which is the Creator informing you as you, is to deny the Creator, and you have been doing this for far too long. Now when you work with the frequency of the Word, you are working in intention. When you claim it, “I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word,” you are setting an intention that you are knowing who you are at the highest level that you may be in accord with. When you decide for yourselves that you have a right to this, those aspects of the self that would deny this will come forward to be reckoned with, and this is a very productive thing. When you decide who you are in your truth, those aspects of the self that you have invested great importance in will come forward to deny your worth as a Divine Being, and they do this for one reason: to maintain their purview. If your world before you is a reflection of who you say you are, and you have built great investment in an identity that will be seen by others in a certain way, you can imagine the uproar when you begin to reclaim the self as the Divine Self. Those aspects of you that would like to shake hands with the world based on a false claim of worthiness—“I am the best one here,” “I am the lowlife,” whatever you have claimed for yourself as an identity—have an investment in claiming purview over all that you see. Now when you know who you are above and beyond these things, and you no longer invest in them as who you truly are, the world before you begins to become malleable because, as we have told you, everything you see before you is a creation, a manifestation of consciousness. Nothing is real except you have all made it real and, consequently, the higher life that you live in an awareness of your worth will call to you a new landscape, and this will become realized by you as you continue to work with this text. When you know who you are in your Divine worth, you can understand that everyone you see before you, regardless of what they present, is also in accord with the truth of who they are, even if they do not know it. The one you don’t
like is still an aspect of the Creator manifested in form because if you are this thing, it must be true for everyone you meet and those you will never meet as well. The crisis you all face on this plane right now is entirely based on the diminishment of the human life. You have all decided that one life is worth more than another and those who believe a certain thing have a right to do this or that while those who believe otherwise may deserve what they get. In order to do this, what you have to do is actually sacrifice the sanctity of the human being, and a life is only sacred if you can believe that there is something that makes it so. The Divine that is inherent in each man and woman regardless of what they say, have done, have believed, have worshipped—the Divine in each being is the aspect of the Creator that is instilled in each being at the inception of its soul. There is nothing within you that cannot be informed by the Divine within you. There is no aspect of your life that can be left outside of it once you understand what it is. And if you know this to be so, you will know that it is so in every being you ever encounter. As you realize yourself in this way—“I know who I am” as a Divine Being, “I know what I am” in this life that I live, “I know how I serve,” which means how you are expressed in your True Self and highest nature —you lift the world before you to its own realization of its Divine worth. Now we said “crisis” prior and we will explain what we mean: The crisis is a crisis of separation and the initial separation, which is man’s sense of self in separation from its Source, is the basis for all separation. Because you believe yourself to be separate from your God, or the Source of your creation, if you wish—it matters not what you wish to call it to us—because you believe this, you believe yourself to be separate from the ones you see before you. And because you are not of the same stuff—because you are not Divine, therefore they cannot be, either—you can do with them as you wish. Now the violation of the self that is incurred by this is enormous, and when one violates the self, that means they violate their truth and, consequently, what has happened is mankind, in her denial of her divinity, has defied her true nature. Paul is asking, “Did you mean ‘defile’?” and we say, no, we said “defy.” Now we will say this with intention: To be in defiance is to be in choice and, if you understand that it has been your choice to deny your true nature, or defy it, by pretending to be separate, you can also see that you have the choice to change. And because you, the individual man or woman, who attends to these
words can change, you must understand that mankind, the human race, can change as well. There is activity happening now in all aspects of you as you read these words. You are jumping up and down and saying “yes,” or wishing to throw the book across the room, or pretending you didn’t read it because it would mean you have to change, but there is still activity, and that means there is movement, and where there is movement there is change. The manifestation of God in man, which simply means the Divine Self has incarnated as and through you, has always been our teaching. And we work with you individually first to support you in this awareness in order to bring you forward to be an aspect of the whole. As many hands come forward to lift the field before them, what may be lifted is your own understanding of who and what you are as a world. As we have said, the world before you is malleable. It was created in consciousness. Consequently, it can and will be re-created, and to deny this as a possibility is to deny the action of the Creator. “Well, we have been doing this this way so long I can’t see how it can ever change.” Well, that’s your business, and you said it yourself, “you can’t see.” When you can see something in its potential—“it may be so”—you create a possibility, and all that is needed for a mountain to be moved is the possibility that it can be so. When enough of you decide individually and together that the world will change, the world will be changed. Some of you say, “It is too late to change. We have charted our course. We are all going to die.” Well, you can have that if you wish, but why choose that? To do that, once again, is to deny the promise of the Creator within you. That aspect of the self who knows who she is, has always known, that will always be there with and as you, has much work to do and will come forward if you allow her to. And what she will bring to you is the manifestation of change that will call her forward to her true essence in all she sees before her. You must understand that, because an aspect of you doesn’t believe that the world can change, it will not change. The Divine Self that operates as you, that is waiting to come forth and claim the Kingdom, knows much more than you do and will align you to all those things you require to know yourself through. Now what is this teaching today? It is a teaching in identity that will continue for some time. Until you understand that the truth of who you are, the Divine Self as you, has much to give, knows much, has much to bring to the world, you
will not claim her in frequency. You will decide for yourself that the small self keeps you safe. You have your diploma on the wall, you have your pedigree from family, you have the ways you’ve known the self, and that will have to do. If you really believe that, you would not be reading these words. The aspect of you that is in accord with this text is the aspect of you who already knows who she is, and the claim of truth we bring you now, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” will lift you to the vibratory proxy of the manifestation of Christ as man. Now we will explain this for you: The purview you have in the material plane is what you know yourself through, those very things that you encounter on a daily basis that affirm the structure that your personality has created to know herself through. She claims her identity in everything she sees because, as we have said, everything she sees is a reflection of her own consciousness. The meanings things have, anything, have been invested in by her based on what she was taught. The aspect of you that we will call the Christ, or the Divine Spark, or the True Self, or the manifestation of God in man, which is always present, knows far more, and as she comes into purview, in her majesty, in her truth, in her brilliance, she will announce herself as you. And this is how she does it: “I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here.” The Divine Self, that aspect of you that is always present, is the one who speaks these words, and in her claim as you she begins to become the ruler of the Kingdom that you see before you. And the Kingdom of the Divine Self, the landscape that she exists in, is vastly different, because she identifies in love, in value, in agreement with the worth of who and what she knows herself to be, and she will not be defied. She has no need to know who she is in value through her creations. She understands that what she sees before her is a manifestation of consciousness and, therefore, can become malleable. But she does not invest in an identity that will appease a cultural dictate, or a family value, or a need to be seen in a certain way. Now some of you may think, “Well, I don’t do that, I don’t care how people see me.” Perhaps you don’t, but the history you carry with you like a bunch of tin cans on a wedding car are clanking behind you all day long. And until you are liberated from the sense of self that was inherited by you, by culture, and
family, and dictates of fashion or worth based on external support from others, you will never know your true name, “I am here, I am here, I am here.” Now as we continue to teach you, we will lead you through some processes, very gently, that will show you how the manifestations you see before you were created by you and what it means for something to be unsteady, or malleable, in the face of consciousness. The next time you go to the store, look at the prices on things and don’t say, “This costs so much,” say instead, “Look what they decided to charge for this thing.” Look how they give it value, and look and compare what has more value than the next and you will decide for yourself in quick certainty that this was done by man and you have been taught what to value more, either by its packaging or somebody else’s sense of what its quality is. This in an agreement, not, “How much does it cost, can I afford it?” but, “Who decided this and based on what?” When you begin to do this, you will begin to see how consciousness operates as well. When you go to the store, what you value, in many ways, is dependent on what you were taught. “I will get the blue sweater. I have always been told I look lovely in blue.” “I will go get the tank. I will keep myself safe, and I will be a soldier because I must be safe.” Whatever the crazy thing is—you may decide for yourself—you will understand that so much of what you would choose is based on historical context, and the value you give yourself and your worth is entirely dependent on things outside yourself. Now we are teaching you something very important, and what we wish you to know and know well is that your value, your true value, cannot be dependent upon anything outside the self. Do you understand this? Your inherent value as a Divine Being cannot be dependent upon anything outside the self because, as long as you are creating a sense of dependency on your external life to show you your value, you are operating with a false God, and we will explain this in later chapters. The Divine as you knows who you are. She knows your needs, your needs for learning, your needs for support, and your needs for unfoldment, and she will meet you every step of the way. But if you are looking for symbols and signals on the walls you pass to remind you of your own importance, or your own value, you are not looking at the right thing. Look to the light, my friends. Look to the Divine and ask this question: “Am I worth my own being?”
“Divine Self, show me that I am worthy of knowing my True Self. Divine Self, teach me to know who I truly am outside of my creations and let me be aligned to my own knowing of my own divinity. I thank you for this and I affirm this by saying, I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.” When you set an intention and you claim, “I am Word through this intention,” you bring the value of the Creator in operation, in action, to support it. Now we will leave you for a little while with these words. And we will resume our chapter as soon as we can, but we would like you to know this: There is no one reading this text who is unworthy of love. There is no one reading this text who is unworthy of a relationship with the Creator, and there is no one born who is unworthy of her own divinity. It is here, it is here, it is here. We thank you for your presence. Good night. Stop now, please.
Day Three We teach now as we can. Now the authority we have as your teacher is to come forward with the degree of certainty about the information we bring through you. And the requirement we have for you, Paul, we say, is to be receptive and not to be so cautious about the quality of the frequency, the information that comes through you. As we teach you, we teach those you encounter, and we must go into an agreement now that what comes forth is for the highest benefit of all who encounter it. As you align to this, you move into our frequency and become the vessel that we may express through more clearly and with more love. Now as we teach you today, we have some things to say about what is true and what is not true. And the first thing we would like you to know is that what we teach you is true for always. “For always” means because we say it now, it will still be true a thousand years from now, at the time that it was stated, correct, but also beyond that. When you have something that holds itself above something else, you have something that exists in a higher way. And the information we offer you, while it may be translated in ways you may comprehend today, would still be true in another language with other frames of reference a thousand years from now. We
say this to you only for one reason: We do not teach you what is current. We teach you what is true. And what is current may be a reliance on language, or fashion, or belief systems that have become common and accessible and, we will say this word, “convenient.” Now we have said in the past that this is not a convenient teaching, and what we mean by this is that you will be challenged, occasionally, to reidentify the self that you exist in as the one who is choosing this path. And the choice to be on this path to your own true worth, the incarnation of the True Self, the Divine as you, is not made lightly. It is not an arduous trek up the mountain, but it is a decisive one. And what we mean by this is, as you transition yourself to move up this mountain to claim the true identity, not only for your own highest good, but for those you may encounter, you will know yourself as the one embarking on this journey in intention. As we stated earlier, we cannot carry you up but we will lead you, and the path we are taking you up today is the pathway of observance. And to be in observance means to see the things before you and understand the value you have given them. And we ask you this for one reason: so that you can begin to decide for yourselves what you care about outside what you have been taught to care about. And we offer you this: If you were to carry two things up the mountain with you, what would you choose? Some of you would say this, “What I need to survive,” others of you would say, “The things I cannot be separated from,” and someone else would say, “I don’t need anything. I will be provided for by Source, by the Creator, as I go on my journey.” In fact, what you carry with you on your journey up the mountain is the conscious self, and the conscious self, the one who observes and identifies and decides, must become your ally. In order for this to work, you must begin to know the self as one who can be trusted. Now this is very challenging for some of you and we will say, yes, you, Paul, as well, because you look at your life as something that has happened to you, something that has changed you, as if you were the rock that was plummeted by the waves and shaped, in such a way, by your own exposure to the elements that you had no choice over. In fact, you are always in choice, and how you understand yourself as one who may be trusted is the lesson of the morning. Now if you count on your hands the times you were wrong about anything, you will be counting for a very long time. But if you were to count again about how much you learned through everything you deemed to be wrong, you would
be counting just as much. So the reframing of the self as the one who is learning is a requirement now, because if you like to blame yourself, you will walk up the mountain on bloody feet, “Oh, look what I did. Look how it happened. I cannot be forgiven for all that I have done in error.” Now if you decide this, “I have the right to be where I stand, to know myself as I am, and to decide for myself that the path I walk is the path that is required for me to learn my own needs, my own way, my own truth,” as you align to this, “I have the right to be where I stand,” you make a very important decision: that no matter what has happened to you, you are still meritful. No matter what you have chosen, high and low and in between, you still have the right to be as you are and, as you are no longer recriminating the self and deciding that you are wrong, you can begin to claim the Kingdom. As we said, the Kingdom is the awareness of the Creator in all things. Now what you see before you is always a reflection of what you have imagined it to be. You have identified things based on what you were taught to see. So, if this is so, you actually have the right to change your mind and see things in a new light in accord with what they truly are and observance, we say —to be the one who sees—is a key action at this time. Where you stand right now has a habituation to it. You sit in your room, on your chair, wherever you may be, and the things that surround you you can identify. You can name them, decide upon their value, and also make a choice about how you wish to relate to them. You are seeing things, interpreting frequency, and understanding what you see based in your own choices. Now we will ask you to do this: Close your eyes for a moment and make a decision that when you open your eyes again you will see everything in a new way. Now you must understand that “new way” means uncodified by expected response. To see something in a new way is actually to align to a possibility of seeing things anew and learning through them. So the re-creation of the self that we are embarking on with you—and that will be the title of this chapter, “Identity and Claim”—as you re-create the self, you must understand that the frequency you hold must realign and what you see before you must be transformed by that alignment. The Christ as you, or the Divine as you, that aspect of you who knows who he is, what she is, may come forward now to inform your sight. When you decide that what you see has been informed by history and the values you’ve given it, you can also understand that this may transition to a higher way of seeing as you agree to it.
Now the fundamental teaching here will continue to be the Divine as you. And if you claim the aspects of the self into manifestation that are who you are, the way you know yourself in the world must be in operation with those claims. The teaching we give you now in observation is simply to see how you see and then lift the sight to the possibility that anything that is seen once may be seen again in a higher way. What we are not asking you to do at this juncture is to decide what you see in a new way, to make decisions about it. We are simply encouraging you to be the observant witness. Now as you do this with us, we would only ask you to claim the identity that you hold thus far. “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” is a claim of truth. When you claim these words, they are always true, whether or not you can comprehend it. The Divine Self as you is ever present. What you are is what you are in this incarnation, at this level of agreement, and how you serve is how you are expressed as the one who may know. Now we say this with you: When you claim these words, you inform the vibration you hold as it is and align it to the Present Self, the Divine Self, the “I Am” that is the True Self of who you are. And as you align to this, it informs your expression. And what you see and how you see it is an aspect of this. Now the creations you see before you, as you witness them, as you look around the room you sit in, the place where you stand, will be informed still, by memory, “That is the book I bought that day,” “That is the chair my father sat in,” “That is the window where I see the snow falling outside,” but the understanding of what these things mean may be altered by the one who witnesses them. And if you ask yourself, very simply, who is seeing, “What aspect of the self am I witnessing as, am I in observance as?” you will begin to understand that what you see is always and ever informed by consciousness. And the recognition of this simply allows you the freedom to transform what you see with a new level of identity. We will explain this very simply: that the Divine as you, the True Self, holds no fear and holds no judgment and as you begin to move to her sight, things will be witnessed, will be seen in a new way. “Behold, I make things new,” is, in fact, the teaching, and what is witnessed by you is a world that is reborn as you begin to see with the eyes of the truth. Now as we continue with this teaching, as we go up the mountain together, the vantage point will continue to change. But where you stand right now is simply, in a way, a recognition that the vision you hold will, in fact, be
transformed by your intention. We are not asking you to decide what you see and how you see it. We are simply asking you to see it in a new way. Now as we continue this teaching, we ask you one thing: to align to yourself as the one who chooses. We have said many times that our students must be in their own authority. We do not want your authority. We want you to stand in your own knowing as the one who may choose. And the directive we offer you now— this is the time to say “yes” to the True Self—must be made by you in choice. The fabrication of a reality that would serve your ego, “Look at the spiritual path I am on,” would actually be a construct of the ego, would offer you an opportunity to be the one who is obeying a teaching without claiming their own independence as the one who may know her own truth. As we witness you now, each and every one of you, standing in the doorway of an important choice, we ask you only this: Are you willing to know yourself in a new way? Are you willing to experience the self outside of what you’ve known yourself as? And if you are, we encourage you now to say “yes.” Yes to who you are, yes to the one you may know as you encounter yourself in your worth, and yes to what may be claimed as you now claim your inherent self: “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We will leave you now and, as we return, we will call you back to what you have known yourself as so that you may call yourself forward and begin the climb up the mountainside. We thank you each for your presence, and we will say this: You are as you are in your knowing, in your freedom, and in your choice to be. Thank you and good night.
CHAPTER TWO
I AM HERE Day Four
T
he sponsorship that you require to continue the work will be made available to you by request. And here is the way we would like you to request the support of the teachers of this text: “Help me to learn what I need to know to know my own Divine worth and propel me forward in the most perfect way for the highest benefit of my True Self’s expression. As I learn, I manifest the lessons that are required for me to grow through, and as I trust this, I allow my life to be my teacher. As I know that I am worthy of this, I claim authority in all situations so that I may know that I am claiming my worth and that the information I require to learn through, that is coming to me as needed, will support me in all my deeds.” Now we say this to you: This is no small task. To begin to see the life that you live as a teacher, as a way of knowing the self, in some ways is to turn your lives upside down. We are not saying that you become self-absorbed and that everything becomes about you. It simply means that when you claim yourself in mastery, you are no longer subject to a sense of self who would like to cry for help and say, “Oh, poor me.” Now this is not a bad thing. Help is always there. If you need help crossing the street, you can request it from the person standing beside you or, for whatever you may need, the help may be brought to you. But if you perceive yourself as the victim of a life, you will continue to create from a passive place
of self-loathing, or fear, or the requirement for others to tell you your value because you cannot do it for yourself. Now we are being very direct with you this morning for several reasons. There is no placation here of the small self, “Well, don’t I have the right to be the victim?” Well, you do have the right if you want to choose it. We are not taking away your will. But what we are saying to you is: How you decide to be in encounter with any situation will call to you the next series of events that you will learn through. Each time you make a choice to be a certain way, to align to the self in a certain way, you claim the potential of that choice to ricochet and propel you forward. So the choice that is made of how to perceive the self in regard to any situation calls to you how the response is manifested in the physical realm. Now this is a very important teaching: To be manifested in the physical realm means something is brought to be, to be in manifestation, and what you call in manifestation is what you require to be in an encounter with to continue your forward motion. As you call your lessons to you, you have some say in how they come about. You are in party, at all times, to your manifestations. They are not happening at you or to you, you are bringing them into being for you and for those you meet, or may never meet. When one man throws a penny on the street and that penny is fetched by another, the one who has fetched the penny has been changed by that action, and the belief that all that you do is solitary and for the self is idiotic. There is nothing that you can do that is not moving in relation to others, and by “moving” we mean impacting or moving energy in one way or another. So the idea that you are sovereign in your choice is true, but what is not true is that you are not accountable to the manifestations of your choices as they may imply an effect upon the world you live in. When you teach yourself your worth: “I have a right to be here, exactly as I am, and there is nothing else that could possibly be so. As I am a manifestation of the Divine, I may know myself in consort with those creations that would reflect this for my own highest good, for my own learning, and for the good of all.” As you decide this is so, what you claim is moving you and your world forward, so your action has an implicit effect upon everything you encounter and everyone you meet.
The idea that you engage in a process like this only to be happy is a ridiculous concept. “Only to be happy” means you get what you think you want based on a prescription of what you believe happiness to be. The true effect of this work is that the life that you live exhibits worth in all ways and recognizes the worth of all regardless of what they present. And as you are able to do this, you lift to the mountainside and may call to you what you require to grow through in your escalation in frequency. We will say this about happiness: It’s a very nice thing, and we are very happy if you are happy, but many of you believe that happiness is the goal of life. If that were the case, why would it ever rain? If happiness were the goal, why would the sun ever scorch your face? You have been gifted with a landscape that will give you varied experience to learn through, and if happiness were the goal there would be no need to continue the trek forward. Well, Paul is getting concerned here. “But what is the goal, then?” The goal is your own worth manifested as you. The action of the Divine operates as and through you to lift in frequency all that you encounter. And the things that you require to learn this through are called to you by your very own consciousness because the aspect of you that knows who she is already will not be denied, and will call to you everything you need so that she can be in her full manifestation. Now we speak to you in high regard. We are not talking to you as children, nor are we telling you you should not be happy. What we are asking you to do is to decide that the life that you live in its current manifestation has been a requirement for your growth so that you can go forward. And we have said that everything you see before you in any way is a manifestation of consciousness and, consequently, what we mean is that your consciousness, the vehicle you operate as and through, has a calling for you and she will be heard, he will be heard, and you will know what it means to sing your own song, to be expressed in fullness as the Christed Self that you are in truth. The demand of this on your own being is to acquiesce to the Divine that exists as you, and align to its requirements for your evolution. The evolution you have thus far, as we said, was required by you to get you in this moment, to encounter the self that has imprinted her consciousness on all she sees before her and decided what things mean. When we spoke to you yesterday and we said, “Imagine for a moment that when you open your eyes, you see all things in a new way,” it was simply an effort to get you to understand the level of choice that you hold as the witness to
what you’ve created. You may choose to call things anything you like, name them in accord with your ideals, or dismiss them because you could care less, anytime you like. But the freedom you have today, in this very moment, is to align to the Divine Self as the one who will carry you, teach you, counsel you, and remember you to its Source in fullness. Now this is a guarantee, and Paul doesn’t like guarantees. He thinks he will be held accountable if we say something and it does not come to pass. Well, that is so silly we will not give it more time. Here is the guarantee: The Christ as you will be known by and as you as you align to this in a requirement for your own teaching. You will say this after us: “On this day I choose to align all aspects of my life to my requirements for growth. And as I let my life become my teacher, I disembody from the small self to the alignment that I may know in my own worth as an aspect of the Creator in manifestation. The alignment that I hold now will call me forward every step of the way on this magnificent journey that I have chosen in accord with my own knowing of my True Self. As I give permission to all aspects of my life to make this transition, I give thanks to all of them for all that they have taught me. And regardless of what I have believed thus far, I give myself permission to know that all that has been chosen was chosen to bring me to this new moment of wonder. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” Now we align you as we can, and if you will be with us for a moment we will encounter you, just as you are. The perfect manifestation of the Creator that you are is seen before us. Wherever you stand, wherever you be, we are encountering you now. And as we witness you, we are saying these words to you in frequency: “We know who you are. We know what you are. We know how you serve. You are here. You are here. You are here.” And if you will take a moment to align to this, you may respond to us in your own voice and you will say this aloud:
“I am here, I am here, I am here.” We rejoice with you now that the Divine Self as you has just called herself into being. The “I Am” that is you has been born anew in the claim “I am here.” And we will rejoice with you again as she begins her unfoldment, as he begins his unfoldment, in the manifestation of the light of the Christed Self as you in all aspects of your life. The treatise we give you in the remainder of this text, if you wish the trek up the mountain, are the aspects of the self, that you have been misinformed by, being restructured in the new way. If you have built a house on a hill that is not sturdy, you may expect it to fall down the mountain. The foundation of our teaching was delivered to you in prior texts, but the information, in a vibratory way, is still present here. So we are assuming, for each of you, that the firmament you require, the ground beneath your feet, if you wish, is being made manifest through your desire and your own claim of worth. The Divine Self as you cannot betray you. You must understand this. The Divine Self as you, as she is given permission to call herself forward, calls to you only those things that you require to learn through. The true teacher that you are, the Divine as you is, will be, your counselor and your leader through the nights that may come. Now you must not think that because you have been aligned at this level of vibration, and yes, you have just been attuned to the vibration of the I Am Self in a higher way, that your life will be what you think it should be. Too many of you go here: “My Divine Self will give me a life that resembles something I read once. It means I will have the perfect mate, my children will excel in school, and I will get that raise I have been planning on,” or, far worse, “I will need nothing of the real world, I will live in spirit and eschew the requirements of the physical plane that I find myself, rather unfortunately, moored to.” What you are doing here is operating from a prescribed sense of self that you have invested in that you appeal to to come into manifestation because it’s what you think should be there. Here is the truth here: The Divine Self as you knows your true requirements. And the small self who has assumed what being spiritual means, or enlightenment means, or understanding through others’ example what it seems to be, may not like what happens next. The journey that you are on is not always a smooth journey. When you have a car that has been overloaded with baggage—and Paul is seeing a convertible car
that is loaded with trunks and luggage riding down a bumpy road—you will assume that some of those bumps in the road will be perfect at dislodging some of that baggage. And as you are so invested in navigating the path before you— Paul continues to see the car and the driver clutching the wheel staring before himself to see what comes next—he does not even notice that the whole backseat has been emptied of the baggage he has claimed. Now what he will keep will be what he requires. And you all must understand this: The divestment of things is only one example. In fact, what you are leaving behind is the investment in the small self about what was so damn important, what you gave so much power to, or what you believed you should value because your world has told you so. When the car comes to its natural stop and you get out and you look at the landscape, you will find yourself untethered, “unbaggaged,” if you wish, from those things that have caused so much weight. Now here is the interesting thing: Some of you actually believe that if you go on this path, you will lose what you require: “What if I don’t have employment?” “What happens to my husband, or my wife, if I go on this journey and they may disagree?” “What happens to the things that I thought were so important?” We will tell you this: There is nothing taken from you. You disregard what is true and put your weight into things that are not so true. The truth of who you are and the vibration of the True Self, as we have said, will support you. The relationships you’ve had, and the things that you require to manifest to keep you safe, may continue to do just what they have done as long as they are in accord with your True Self and, if you wish, congruent to the journey you are calling to you. But we will ask you this: Please do not use this text as an opportunity to say, “Well, now I’m done with that. Clearly I must quit my job, or leave my spouse.” That would also be presumptuous. You must understand your soul is with you. The Divine Self is operating as and through you and will call into being what you require to learn through and this will include the relationships you have. We will spend time on relationships later in this text because that is one of the primary ways you know who you are through, through your relationships and the manifestations of them. But the requirement now, as we would say, is still perception, identity, how you know yourself at this important juncture. Each one of you here who has chosen this path with us is being given a token in energy, and a token is something you may hold. It’s actually only valuable as a symbol, something to hold to, to remember something else, “a token of our
esteem,” if you wish. The token we are gifting you each with is our voice imprinted in your field. And these are the words we are gifting you with: “You are here, you are here, you are here.” And the “here” we speak of is now, and the “you” we are speaking to is the Divine Self. As this is imprinted in your field, in the frequency you hold, you may align to it in activation at any moment by responding to those words, and we will say to do this aloud as you need to: “I am here, I am here, I am here.” The Divine as you, operating as and through you, will be known by you in this claim. You are reawakening the self to its service and purpose by acknowledging it as the True Self as you, and the claim “I am here,” which will be the title of this chapter, will unfold in your life as you say “yes.” Now we have a few things to teach you still about what you don’t need. You do not need the approval of others, you do not need to tell yourself you’re not worthy of it, and you do not require yourself to pinch yourself in the awakening, “I must know this in a manifested way in order to trust it as so.” You must understand that the vibration that we work with, while palpable to most and available anytime, is not a parlor trick, and the frequency you require to operate through, gifted to you by the Divine Self that you are, is what is most important. The token we gave you is not only an emblem. It is a manifestation of our vibration aligning to you to support you on your own journey. Your own journey, we say, will not be codified by us because you all incarnate for very different reasons. Paul is surprised by this answer. He thinks you are all here to learn because that’s what we have taught thus far, and that is always so. But each lifetime also has a map attached to it. Now this is not a directive map, but it is a map of the things you require to manifest, or encounter yourself through, to bring you to the next station of consciousness. This does not mean bad things befall you. If you have a list of things you must know, or reencounter, or learn anew in a lifetime, the Divine Self as you will call into being that which is required to make it so. But we are telling you now that as the Divine Self calls into purview her manifestation, the ways that you learn, the lessons you agree to learn, may come
in very different ways. The trajectory of each lifetime, while it is known by you on a true level, the outline, perhaps, of what may be known as gifted to you at the conception of each life, may be known, but the vibration you hold, in many ways, informs how the teaching will come. When you are operating in low vibration you must call things to you that are in accord with that frequency. The action of fear, as we have taught you, is to create more fear, and when you are operating in fear and you claim fear, that becomes your teacher until you decide otherwise. When you move into the frequency of the light, or the Christed Self, as it is manifested as you, what it will call to you will be what it requires. The lessons may be the same, you see, but you may learn to cook a cake in a gutter or in a fine kitchen, it really depends on what you hold as your frequency. Now as we teach you, we operate in truth, and the vibration of truth that we support in each of you can move into coresonance with us as the ones sponsoring the text, and here is how this is done: When we tell you this, “We know who we are, we know what we are,” we operate in truth. We call into the field the remembrance of truth as we are. You can do the same. The claim “I am in truth” will support you in aligning your field to the vibration of truth in all aspects of your life. Now this is a very important thing to understand. The way that we teach is through an echo of vibration. We teach through Paul and his energy field, in many ways, is assumed by us to bring forth this teaching and to support the students. However, Paul is only a proxy for the teaching. The vibration of truth that we hold, while it informs Paul and, consequently, informs the reader, is available to you as you call on the teachers to align you in truth. When you claim these words, “I am setting the intention to align my field to the vibration of truth,” you are doing so of your own free will. Here is what happens: The energy field that you hold, and the conscious self that is informed by that, moves into an agreement that you may hold the vibration of truth. And those things that are not in truth, that are operating in fear masquerading as something else, that are operating in knowing of your own worth but not in alignment to its own truth in the highest way, will be brought into an understanding for you. And this is very good news. The truth of who you are, the Divine Self as you, can hold no fear. And you must understand this: that by going into agreement with truth at different levels, you may move the frequency that has obstructed its expression to the surface to be witnessed and released.
This is an interesting process for many of you. If you can imagine for a moment that you have been swimming in the sea and you are covered in the salt from the sea, and when you come forward to the shower the salt moves off you. You may taste it; it may sting your eyes when the water washes you clean from the showerhead. You forgot the sting of the ocean, the taste of the sea, until it was moving off of you. The remembrance of what was there may make itself known, and you may not like the taste of it and the vision of it may sting your eyes, but you must understand that your alignment to the frequency of truth is actually healing you and cleaning you from all distortion. “Distortion” is a very good word to use, and most of you operate in distortion all day long. From the moment you open your eyes, you witness a world and you have ideas about what you see. “Oh, it’s a Monday, it will be a hard day.” “Oh, that’s my favorite pillow, I cannot sleep without it.” “Oh, the sun is shining, I thought it was going to rain.” These are all ideas, not a damn thing wrong with any of them, but the ideas that you hold, in many ways, prescribe your experience of what is to follow. What we would offer for you, that upon awakening, the first thing you say is, “I am in alignment to truth,” will actually claim the day for you to be in agreement to move beyond the superficial perception of everything and see what may be true. This is not just an exercise but a way of being in manifestation, “I am in alignment to truth in all that I perceive.” Paul is asking a question and we will answer this one. He is asking, “How can we know the truth if we haven’t known it yet? If we’ve always believed a certain thing to be true and it was not true, how will we know the difference?” The scales fall from the eyes, you see, and you are witnessing with the eyes of the Divine and as we teach you this, to witness the world with the eyes of the Christ, you will see truth in ways you cannot imagine. Now there are different levels of truth. “I am in a man’s body in this lifetime” is a true statement for Paul, but “I am not only a man” is also a true statement that any one of you may make. You know that you are vastly more than your gender. As you begin to operate as the one in perception expressing your consciousness, what you perceive will be brought to you, and the levels of knowing, or the operation of truth through you in what you encounter, will be revealed to you in ways you may know. And we like the word “know” so we will draw a circle around it. When you are in your knowing you are in truth and this will always be the case. When you know who you are at a true level, your life will teach you and reflect truth in all
ways. When you are operating in distortion and your eyes perceive things as they were taught to see, as they were taught to understand, you begin to create more distortion, you are operating in assumption at all times of what things mean. Here is a new truth: There is nothing true except the truth. And we will understand this with you as we teach you. If there is a truth, it is always an eternal truth. “That is a blade of grass before me,� you may say, and that is always a true statement. At that moment in time there was always a blade of grass. The Infinite Self that is you is present throughout all of your incarnations and has been awaiting its opportunity to bloom. And the fragrance of the bloom, which will inform all you meet and radiate as your essence to everyone you may encounter, will become a vehicle of expression and a tool to lift the world you see before you. When you lift your world, you also lift the world for everyone you will ever meet and those you may never meet. Because as we operate in frequency and we lift above the lower manifestations that mankind has known himself through, we create the opportunity for all things to lift, to be greeted in their true worth, in their knowing of who and what they are. Now we will leave you shortly, but we wish to continue a little longer with a new lesson in identity. The True Self knows who she is. The mask she has worn up until today was an agreed-upon mask. You know yourself through circumstance and you know what you are supposed to be to adhere to the requirements of your culture, or your family, or the times that you exist in. The Eternal Self, if you wish, has been here a lot longer, knows much more, and does not self-identify through your hair color, or your gender, or your occupation, or your role in society. It has no intention of limiting itself through the physical plane. But as you manifest the Divine Self, the Christ as you, and you incarnate at this level of vibration you are actually projecting that vibration into the physical realm, but the two things are not always in congruence. You get to understand, as you progress, that each step forward, or each step up the hill, calls to you a new agreement, a new way of being in an encounter. You do not eschew the realm that you were born into. This is not about disregarding the physical realm. As you align to your own divinity, your response is to lift the physical realm to its true nature and that is how the Kingdom will be perceived. We will leave you now with these words. And we would like you to say them with us:
“I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We are with you now. Let us be with you now. And let us say, “Yes, you are here, you are here, you are here.” Thank you each for your wonderful presence. We are blessed to know you. Thank you and stop now, please.
CHAPTER THREE
UNION Day Five
T
his is the day of a new beginning, a new awakening to the True Self that you have always been. The message we have for you today is a very simple one: You must be who you are, and we would like you to underline the word be. The alignment to the True Self as the one you are is the action of your being, and there can be nothing outside of the self that dictates who you are when you are in an awakening of this news. Now we will start again for Paul, who is worrying about the transmission. We will stop the tape. We will begin again in a moment for him. Period. (Pause) We would like to begin this chapter with the news of the day: Each one here is beginning to understand that she has come to know herself in a new way. And in this knowing what will begin to happen is that the life that you lead will begin to reflect the Awakened Self who has come into being. Now what this requires of you, in a very simple way, is an acceptance of where you are in this very moment. You must all understand that you can only be as you are—and we would like you to underline this—you can only be as you are. And the acceptance of this, where you stand, is what supports you in any kind of motion. The action of this text will be, and continues to be, to align your own vibratory field to your own true manifestation and support you, as we can, in your own understanding of the expectancy of what comes when you align to it. What we are calling you, and
underline the word you, is responsible for the self in two different ways: the Divine Self as you—the Christed Self, if you wish—and the smaller self in identity who knows who she is through her experiences, her claims on this plane. What we would like you to do now is to begin to respond to the self in this moment that you stand in. As you stand in this moment and accept the self just as you are, you will begin to understand that there is nothing other than where you are. Nothing else. Nothing else may be known or understood outside of where you stand. It is only an illusion that there is a world beyond you, if you truly understand that the identity you hold, the aspect of the Creator, knows all and is in all. Understand this, please, the teaching we are giving you now is that you are infinite and the reality that you hold as the infinite being supersedes all other creations. So we are saying to Paul: Will you allow us to teach today? Your worry is interfering. He doesn’t understand the teaching thus far and, therefore, is censoring. We have two options with you now: to begin the teaching again, as if this is a new chapter, or delay for a moment, let the two of you discuss, and then reconvene on another day. We will say this: The teaching that you have been receiving thus far is a true teaching. When Paul hears things like “there is nothing outside of the self,” he doesn’t believe it. But we must say this again: The idea of a shared construct of reality simply means that each one of you who exists on this plane is contributing to the manifestations of form that you know yourself through. When we say they are not real, we don’t mean that they don’t exist in physical form, we mean that the physical form that they exist in is a malleable form. If you can understand that if you assume there to be a hallway outside the door you open, there will be the hallway there because you expect it to be, as do others, and it has come into form to support your own requirements. Now Paul is asking, “Are you telling the truth? I know there’s a hallway out there.” You assume there’s a hallway out there. Where you sit right now, behind a closed door, invites you to imagine what’s beyond it. The shared hallway that exists beyond your front door is a creation of many people who require the thoroughfare to go in and out of this building you sit in. “But is it real?” you ask. It is real at this level of creation, at the level of manifestation and expectation that you exist in, it’s perfectly real, but it is also malleable to identity and to your experience of yourself.
Now the manifestation of things—“things,” we would say, being things made or brought into form—must be understood by you in order for this teaching to continue. As we see you, we see you in vibration, a field of energy that has taken shape at a lower, dense nature to have an experience in the world that you live in, which is also energy that has been formed and amassed to reflect the requirements of the ones who are here. As the exchange occurs, what is in frequency becomes form, the manifestations make themselves known in a material realm, a material realm being a way that you see yourself in the physical sense and through the senses you hold. What you are really, and what all things are, are manifestations of the Creator vibrating at different levels. And as you see yourself in consort with your physical reality you mistakenly assume that that is what you are. In fact, what it is is an expression, a way of being known in form. But it is not the only form you take. We will say this to you, Paul: If you wish to stop the recording, you may do so now. You and Victoria can have a nice conversation and we will continue when we like. We will promise you this: We are teaching you in accuracy and the level of expression that you hold thus far is aligning to this information, which is new to you. You don’t accept what you have not been taught in prior lectures. And as we move this text forward—in perfect ways, we would say—we must require you to become the one who says “yes” to the dictation as it wishes to occur. Now you will take a pause and talk. If you continue the text, you may call this an interruption. Period. Period. Period. (Interruption) This is the way we would like to work. We would like to let Paul go. We’re going to let him take a walk around the block, or go upstairs and take a nap. And we will sit here with Victoria and have a lovely conversation about the text and what we would like to do. We will talk about where it goes in the text, or if it stays in the text at the end of the section, so Paul can relax a bit and stop investing in an outcome that actually has very little to do with him. The writing of this text is happening in a group effort. There are nine of us here today who are working on dictation and as we learn how to work with one another and through Paul in the varying ways we can, we encounter his resistance, which is not always his dilemma, but the group dilemma, and not this
group, but the readers’ dilemma encountering information that challenges what they have known. Now as we are teachers, we are used to resistance and we are used to coming across things that must be rendered in different ways to be understood by a different audience. Paul is an aspect of us in a certain way, in that his alignment to us was brought forth in this incarnation to be participatory to this work. So the agreement that was made prior to this incarnation that he would be available and serve as a conduit was something that was agreed to and continues to be accepted by him as he works with us. The difference between he and us is that we exist at a level where we accept ourselves perfectly. We make no demands on ourselves to be other than we are and, consequently, we are in love. The man we call Paul, who we know well and have been with in many incarnations, is learning many things in this incarnation and will continue to grow into his own awareness of who he truly is. The text of mastery was not brought forth for him, but for all, and he feels a level of accountability as the channel. He does not want to dissuade others from what they have believed and what he has gone into agreement with. So when we teach you things, “nothing is real,” “there is no hallway outside this door except the one you have all decided must be there,” he wishes to cease the sessions because they challenge his understanding of what is true. As we were beginning to teach you, there are varying levels of truth. Each thing may be true at the level that it exists in. Yes, in the physical realm there is a hallway, but the physical realm, as a reflection of spirit, as something that been molded as if in clay by consciousness, exists for you to know yourself through. But in a higher way, it is still made up of frequency. Everything is energy, you see, vibrating at different levels. Because you have named things and called them into being, because you are the creators of your world, you must understand that the consequences of your creations are your responsibilities. You would like to blame a Creator for the injustice in the world, you would like to blame your neighbor for her ways of behaving that you do not like, but you are not understanding that the Divine Self, the True Self that you are, has the potential to be realized in a much higher way. And as this happens, the dilemmas that you face with your neighbor, with your planet even, will be resurrected in a higher vibration. In a higher vibration with less density there is even more malleability to be re-created, and what begins to happen on this plane
is a rebuilding of society with an intention to know the holiness that truly is existing in all things. Now if you understand what “holy” means, which is “of the Creator,” and you understand that energy, or the frequency that we speak to, is the Creator vibrating at different levels of frequency, you can understand that the Creator is in all manifestation. And the dilemma you face, when you see things that you do not like, is to assume that they are not of the Creator, and you create a dilemma for yourself because you cannot believe in a God that would allow suffering, or the abandonment of children, or murder, or war. The evils you speak to are actually mankind acting in his own way, in free will in accord with what he has been taught in an ignorance of his True Self, and in an ignorance of the holiness of all things. If you damn anything, anything at all, you are putting it outside of the Creator. And, as there is nothing that can be outside of the Creator, what you are damning calls you to it, and puts yourself in ignorance, or in a sense of separation— underline the word sense—of the Creator you say you want to be with. Now there can be no real separation, but the illusion of separation, which is what you operate with on this plane, must be contended with by us. And that is the purpose of this chapter, to get you to understand that everything is illusory only in that it is all energy being constructed by you each individually, yes, and collectively, yes, to have this experience here. If you understand that the hallway, or what you would call the hallway, is as holy as anything else, you will begin to perceive with new eyes. Now Paul is interrupting, “So murder is holy? Your argument makes no sense!” Well, this is not an argument, my friend, it is a teaching, and murder, we would say, as an act, is not holy, it is a response by a being who has forgotten his holiness but is still holy. So here lies the dilemma: How can you perceive the Creator in all manifestation when you decide that certain things have no right to be? Everything that you see was created, and that includes the ones, the beings you know and see before you. If you could see them as we see them, you would be stunned at the ferocity of love that exists within each man, even if she has not awakened to it. The calculated self, the self that plots and plans, decides what things must look like, has an investment, you see, in maintaining her purview on this landscape. And while we understand those aspects of you and we come to
educate you about them, we are doing this to realize you as the loved ones you are, who knows himself, herself, outside of separation. “Can this be achieved?” Paul is asking. “May we know union?” You may know it, yes, but you must first understand that it already exists. There is a level of frequency with you now that is in union with All That Is, that only knows herself as one with all, with all things. This aspect of you, which we call the Divine Self, who we call forward to her true state of realization, is the encounter with the self as and of the Creator. If you understand what union means, which is “one with,” you can understand that we are not just telling you you are God, which sounds like a fallacy, we are really telling you that you are of God, as is everything else. The truth of you, of all mankind at a level of frequency that you are not yet at in your consciousness, is already fully aware of this union. The Divine Self as you, as she is awakened to you, calls into manifestation what she requires. And what she requires is the awareness, and perception, and alignment, and congruence, and respect of the union that is present in all things. So the surface level of your awakening may be, “I know I am a Divine Being as I walk through the supermarket, as I plan my day,” but the true realization of the Divine as you is the aspect of the Creator that knows all things at this level of recognition: “I am holy, as is all, as is all, as is all. I am holy as is all.” Now as you know this to be so, your transition begins to occur with rapidity, and the awareness of change is so quick that it is as if you are being moved from one landscape to another, because, in fact, you are. The landscape that you know in the physical realm that was made in history and shared agreement of what should be there will be understood by you simply as a construct, something that was once said “yes” to. And the awareness of what lies beyond this land as it moves to you renders it as something that was serving a purpose in another time. Now what does it mean to know yourself in union? It simply means to be one, and to be one with All That Is, we would say, does not remind you of anything you have known, so it’s a challenge, in some ways, to teach it to you with language that you can understand. The child in the womb knows herself as one with the mother. The sense of individuation occurs in time, but the child is a product of what it comes from. Mankind, in some ways, while she knows at a certain level in her heart, you could say, in her group memory, if you wish, that she is Divine, has existed in a
sense of separation for so very long that she renders the separation as absolute fact. When something has been rendered as absolute fact, it takes solidity and form, and structures will be built, things erected and made to create even more separation. Because as mankind sees herself as separate from her Source, she demands to be separate from all but the few that she decides that she can be close with. The sense of separation, you see, is very easy to describe because you were brought up in it. The understanding of union at the level of intellect may be brought to you. But it is the experience of it that we are calling to you through our series of teachings. The experience of union, we say, moves you outside of your understanding of time. And here is the big dilemma: Because you know yourself in time as a shared construct, knowing the Eternal Self who does not exist in time, and knowing union, which is not in time, becomes something that moves you outside of the known. So Paul is asking, “Well, if it’s that impossible, how do we do it?” You do not do it. It is done through you. Understand this, everyone: The Divine operates as and through you. You are not pulling the strings on the machine that would enlighten you. The auric field you hold has actually been built in an awareness of her union, and the causal body, if you wish, in the field you hold, holds the awareness for you and is in union now in an awareness you don’t know. The response you have, and the responsibility that it incurs, is to support yourself in your own awakening by realizing the self through methods we teach you, through forgiving the false self for what it has incurred and reidentifying as the Divine Self you are so that the vibration and the truth of who you are may be called into fullness. Paul continues to see the image of a faucet being turned on and the field being filled with a frequency. And that is actually not what happens, but if that’s what he needs to begin to assume such a thing can be so, we will say you can use it for now, if it supports your own awakening. In fact, what happens is the sense of division begins to move away. What you have borne witness to in separation becomes one, and as you change your mind about separation, you and yourself, you and your brother, you and those you see before you, you increase in rapidity your own vibration. As you increase your own vibration, you may align to those things that exist in similar form, and here we call the Kingdom into being. Union, we say, and the awareness of union, is in the Kingdom. It is the gift of the Kingdom. And as you begin to exist there, while you may operate in time
because you are physical beings still, you require food and shelter; you also exist in the awareness of the validity of All That Is informing each thing before you. You understand, yes, that the Kingdom, as you know it, is an ideal. It has been said before that the Kingdom of Heaven is at hand, and it has always been at hand. In fact, it has always been present. It is another dimensional reality that coexists with the one you live in, and if you understand that the fields that you hold in your vibration correlate to different levels of creation, you will understand that there is an aspect of you here that knows herself in heaven now. And heaven, we say, as the Kingdom, is always present. Paul is confused. “Is the Kingdom of Heaven and the heaven we know of the same thing?” In fact, it is not. Most of you assume that heaven is someplace you go to when you die. It is simply a level of vibration that the spiritual form knows itself through, and when the physical self passes away, the small self, if you wish, is diminished and the true nature of the self is actually reborn, or knows herself again in the other dimension that she was always in, in a certain way. But that is one field, and there are levels of awareness beyond that. The Kingdom of Heaven, as we teach it, is always present, may be known now and after you pass and elsewhere as well. It is here, it is here, it is here. And the Creator as you, who knows this to be so, will support you in your way. Paul is in the way: “You were talking about time. What do you do about time? Time is a construct—what the hell does that really mean?” It means when a group of people, if you like, “people,” or conscious beings, decide things and go into an agreement, you create a structure. And time, in many ways, is the way you structure your experience as you exist here. This is not the only place you exist in. When you go into a dream, you are actually existing in a higher dimension, and there is no time in dreams, so you have an awareness of this already. Time is a construct of the physical plane. You know yourself in time because it’s how you’ve chosen to know yourself and you have given yourself ways of delineating time that support the shared agreement. Time is a construct. It is neither good nor bad. It is a shared agreement of how you exist on this plane. The Divine Self as you who exists outside of time actually holds the awareness of all lifetimes you will lead, past, present, future, in your journey forward. Paul is asking, “Do all things exist at once?” In fact, they do, but not in a way you may understand. If you think of things as layers, and circles within layers, you have an easier understanding of how time is layered. If you turn something
around, what was before will become after. If you turn something on its side, the layers will resemble something different. You know yourself in time in a linear form. You think in these terms. But if you were to turn time upside down, you would have a different experience of yourself. If you can understand, yes, once again, that a construct is a made thing, you can also understand that it is malleable and may be known in different ways. As you move in your science, you will begin to unfold that the frequency you hold, in and of its own nature, may move through time and that the body is not essential for this. Paul is asking, “Is that what I do when I read? When I tune in to people as they were when they were young?”* Absolutely yes, but you don’t even know that you can tune in to people when they are old, and have the experience of them then. The only reason you can move out of time when you are sitting with another and doing a reading is because you are moving outside of the physical self as the way to perceive. You are unmoored from this reality to the extent that you can hear the one before you in your mind and step into the fields of the ones that they ask about. This should give you some sense of proof that the mooring of time is simply a construct. Now all mankind has the capacity, the innate capacity, to do the kind of work that you do when you are tuning in to another and supporting them in the ways that you have been learning to. But mankind must first understand that she is not the body she sits in, nor the job she holds, nor the funds in the bank account, nor the pedigree she has been given, nor the house she lives in, the culture she was born in, or the country she resides in. She is not a servant of the physical realm and until mankind understands that this will always be true, she will busy herself with the obligations she has called to herself in the physical realm and looked for the physical realm to achieve her true nature. Your physical self will not be achieved in the Divine ways we teach you through a better job, a better marriage, or more money. They will be achieved through the reidentification of the self as the True Self, as the Holy Being you are. Now here is what we teach you: You are who you say you are. You cannot call yourself an elephant; that is not who you really are, but the re-creation of the self, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” is the awareness of the Divine as you. You may work as a secretary, you may work as a father, you may live your life in a community, but if you self-identify as those things only, you are missing the point completely.
The Divine as you has created experiences for you here that wish to unfold for you to know yourself through, but in order for this to come into being fully, you have to claim it. “I am here, I am here, I am here,” is the claim of the Christ as you, who has the alignment already to call into manifestation the journey she requires to learn and grow through. The division you know yourselves as—“I am a woman,” “I am a man,” “I am an accountant,” “I am a pilot,” “I am happy,” “I am angry”—the ways of naming the self are always, in some ways, in opposition to something else. When you call yourself one thing, it implies that you cannot be the other. The unity of the self, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” the unity of the Divine as you, seeks her expression in union. And that will be the title of this chapter: “Union.” Now we will ask you this: What do you need to know? The reader we ask, Victoria we ask, and Paul we ask: What do you need to know? As you ask us questions, we will support you as we can. And the question we would like to answer now is the big question: “Why? Why are we separate? Why do we live lives in separation? What was the reason for this, and how could this happen to us? If there is a Creator, how did this come to be?” Here is the answer: You are not separate, you have never been separate, but you have called into manifestation separation through the denial of your own true worth. And the denial of your own true worth, which you were aligned to throughout most of your history, is being readdressed now. How did it happen? You chose it, in some ways, believe it or not. Sometimes in ignorance, sometimes in accord with the teachings of others, but it was chosen by you, in many ways, to have the experience of separation so that you may know yourself again as you truly are. You cannot appreciate the warm weather without the cold, and your journey through separation as a species is ending, it is ending, it is ending. The new dawn is here, you see, and has been waiting to come into manifestation. Here is the next question: “Why now?” This was achieved by you, by the human race, in prior incarnations, before your time, as you know it. The teaching of the Garden, in some ways, is a parable for mankind’s memory of her own union with the Divine, and the sense of separation that mankind incurred through choice, through negligence, in some ways, of the holiness of all things that became fully manifested in separation to the degree that it has as you see it. As you understand, the human race is at a juncture. You have actually created the means to annihilate yourselves, and you
have moved so far in separation that the pendulum swing has begun again. The denial of separation that exists in the Garden is already in your Present Self. The memory of union is present here, and so you will know again what this time is about. Some of you look to astrology, which is merely a map of what can be, significators of possibilities, and some of you look to religion, “Is this the time that they spoke of? Is this the time that we all face the devil?” In fact, you do face the devil, and the devil is only fear. That’s all the devil has ever been. You must face fear, in a certain way, to understand that it is an illusion. What you are asked by fear is to protect yourself, and how do you protect yourself but by erecting walls, and if the wall is not high enough, by building ammunition that you may shoot over the wall for the destruction of those you never know because they exist beyond a wall so high you never knew their names? The Divine as you, here and now, demands to be known by you and the claim we have given you, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” is the claim of mastery. The fields that mankind holds, the Divine as you in the true imprinting of the self, has been aligned to this time in preparation. And we will say this: There is no accident. The time has come for the resurrection, and the resurrection is and always has been the Christed Self knowing itself as the world it lives in. So while the Bible is, in some ways, a parable and in many ways a confused teaching of historical data, the truth of the teaching of the Christ will always be true, because when something is true it can never be altered. The Christ in mankind may be called by many names and any religion will find a way, at its essence, to name the seed of God that exists within. The awareness of this in texts, in prior teachings, has been in preparation for a violent shift in the consciousness of the species you are in. Paul is saying, “Why do you use the word ‘violent’?” Because for some it will be. When someone has taken a drug that has kept them in a deep sleep, and a sleep so deep that a whisper in the ear will not awaken the rester, that the awakening must come with a violent shake, you will comprehend that for many who are in deep, unconscious ways reinforcing the need for separation and claiming it into being, they will require something large to call them into the awareness of the foolishness of their actions. Others of you, you see, have come and incarnated at this time to shepherd the way for others. And in your half-awakened state—and we say, you are only halfawakened—you have an awareness of what can be, of what can be held, and an awareness of God either as a symbol, or a man on a cloud, or a universal force that is, in fact, a way to access the higher dimensions—and will be awoken in a
different way. You may require a push on the back, a whisper in the ear, or, in Paul’s case, a bucket of water on the head, when you go to sleep, or become frightened of yourselves as one who is here to sing the new song in preparation for the chorus that will follow. You understand, yes, that this is a teaching of the manifestation of God in man, but you don’t understand yet that many of you would like to throw rocks at the teacher and burn the teaching. Because if the teaching is true, it really means that what they were taught about their own superiority, their own ability to starve their neighbor, to war against their brother, is a teaching of a false god. And if they want to worship their false god, they cannot be aware of the truth and stay comfortable. We are challenging many minds here in this teaching. Those of you who wish to stay asleep and have already read this far and claimed the words, “I am Word through my body, Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration, Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word,” have already been responsible for an attunement in your field, which means you can now play the Divine broadcast. It becomes very difficult to ignore—painful, in fact, to ignore—the voice of the Divine as it expresses itself through your field. So like it or not, you will have choices to make. When you are in a bad dream and you are awoken from a bad dream, you are usually very happy. But if you believe that the bad dream that you have been living in is the true nature of reality, you will do what you can to protect it, because you are too frightened of what else there may be. We are going to continue this teaching now, and we are saying this for Paul, who is saying, “Are you going to keep talking?” We will say, “Yes, why not? The teaching of unity is an important teaching.” The next question we would like to address is your own violation of your own true nature. This is going to be very uncomfortable for many of you, but we must say it: You are all in the process of realigning yourselves to your own Divine Nature, and every aspect of you that is in denial of this will be attended to by you in the weeks and months to come. Perhaps years, yes, but if you are really working with this text, you will be dealing with a lot and very quickly. This is not a crash course, but it is a thorough cleansing of the false self and the residue
that releases, the dirt that may wash away if you prefer, are only those things that have created shadow, that stops the light that you are from shining in fullness. Many of you have aspects of your lives that may operate in consort with an awareness of the Divine as you. You may feel like your True Self in certain ways when you engage in certain activities with certain people. When you are feeling fully realized—underline the word feeling, because a recognition of what you feel may be helpful here—but many of you, and all of you, in fact, have aspects of the life that you live that have been shrouded in darkness, or confusion, and require healing. If you can imagine that we are unfolding you very, very gently and peeling away the baggage, or the layers of ignorance, or the layers of fear that you have attended to as real, you can understand that what you are dealing with is a new sense of responsibility to the creations of the self. The disfigurement of the self, as we have taught it in prior teachings, is merely the misidentification of the self as something corrupt, or wrong-minded, or fearful. And we say “misidentification” because, in order for any of these things to be true, you cannot be the Divine Self that you are. If you can imagine a man made of clay with a burning heart at the center, you can imagine that the clay thinks it’s the self and the burning heart is something that existed prior to its being made. If you now realize that the burning heart in the clay man will actually soften the clay and wipe away the clay so that what is truly left is the expression of the light, you will understand what we mean. The attendance to the True Self will require you to look at your lives, your lives being those things that you created, and investigate, in a certain way, why you made them. What aspect of you was deciding for you? And how you can attend to them, these choices you have made in times prior, will be brought to you through this teaching as we can give it to you. The last thing we wish to say to you about this question is that the false self will have a great investment in perpetuating herself. If you can imagine a woman at a party wearing a mask so tight that she has believed the mask to be her true face, you can understand that there may be fear at removing the mask because she does not know what is underneath. She might believe herself to be disfigured, or not lovable, or not beautiful in the way that the mask presents. In fact, that could be so, but is never true. The Divine exists with each of you and it is beautiful, and the true radiance of your beauty cannot shine forth when you mistake yourself for the mask you wear.
We will ask you this question now: What is required for your growth? What do you need individually to know yourselves through, to be in recognition of your own divinity? We would like to give you something now, and we offer it to you if you wish it. We would like you to take a walk after you read this chapter, sometime within the next day, and ask yourself what you need and begin to align to the possibility that it may be called to you in vibration. Paul’s arms are moving as he sits in the chair. He is calling things to him in vibration. We are actually doing this through him in proxy; what he is actually doing is calling things into manifestation for the reader. As you go on your journey, as you go on your walk, allow yourself to receive. Allow the needs of your life to be met in the ways that are most perfect for you. We are supporting this creation in your field, and your field, we say, is what calls things to you. So Paul is getting in the way. “Are you telling these people that if they walk down the street and they are telling themselves that they need their phone bill paid, you are going to do it?” That is not what we are teaching. We are saying to them, “Think of what you need to realize yourself through, and let it be called into being.” We are working with you. We will show you the way up the mountain before us. We are privileged to give you this teaching and we will say to Paul, regardless of what you think, we will include this in our text. Thank you, Victoria, for your presence, and thank you to Paul for your willingness to sit through the resistance to the teaching, and thank you to the reader for being willing to attend to our words. We will say good night. Stop now, please.
Day Six We ask you questions today about the requirements for your growth. If you look at your lives, if you look at the lives you lead today, the answers for the areas of growth should be implicit in what you see. You will see yourself in encounter with others, you will see yourself in your work, you will see yourself in your desires and you will understand several things. The way you place yourself in encounter with other things challenges you, in many ways, to redecide what it means to be yourself as the one in truth. If you
stand in your kitchen and you look about the room and you see yourself in encounter with the things there, you will see things you have agreed to. You chose the pots and pans, or agreed to their placement. You decided on the color of the wall, or decided it was fine to keep it as it was. As you place yourself in this landscape, you may see what you have seen, but you may also understand that the possibilities that are inherent for change are available for you to see in your imagination. Understand this again, please. Everything that has been chosen may be chosen in a new way. And the new way we ask you to choose from today is in an awareness of who and what you are outside of the names that you have claimed for the self thus far. As we have taught you so far, and instructed you in this place of being, we have encouraged you to witness things in a new way, to decide that things may be seen in a different way for the benefit of expansion of potential. Until you understand that nothing can be transformed until you see it in its potential, “This may be changed, this may be known in a new way,” you cannot align to the possibility that will call the new into being. We have taught you this prior, but we must encourage the readers to reinvestigate the landscape they exist in and understand, first and foremost, that everything they see before them they have agreed to in consciousness. There is nothing in your world that you have not said “yes” to, because it could not be present for you if you had not agreed to it. “Well, I didn’t agree to my bad marriage,” you may be saying, “or the behavior of my child. I didn’t agree to what my boss did at work”—and we must tell you that is not the case. On a level of vibration there can be nothing made that you are not in consort with, individually and collectively. Thus far, we have attempted to teach you about your own creations through the ways you have claimed identity. The manifestations you see before you, those things that have been made firm, or appear to be firm, are creations of the mind brought into achievement in consort with your fellows to make a creation that you may all witness before you. As you understand this, the creations before you that have appeared to be so firm must become changed by your witnessing of them. The life you’ve lived in agreement with others has created the landscapes you share yourselves through. Now here we go:
“On this day I choose to liberate myself from the shared landscape that I have invested my life in. And the shared landscape I release myself from is the landscape of limitation, the landscape of fear, and the landscape that tells me that I may not know myself in my true way. As I affirm this, I see my world before me, those things that I have agreed to, consciously and unconsciously, and I realize them for what they are: creations of the mind, creations of the field that may be transformed by my own awakening. And as I witness the world before me, I begin to see the paint peel, the situations uncover, the structure itself beginning to bend as my new world shapes itself to conform to my true nature. I know who I am, I know what I am, and I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We welcome you now to the new landscape that you may exist in. If you imagine yourself, for a moment, standing in a doorway to a brilliant room, a room so brilliant that goes on forever and is contained only by love, we will invite you to enter and say, “Yes, I know who I am, and I know myself as a citizen of the Kingdom. We are here, we are here, we are here.” Now what you have just chosen in your mind, in your being, in your claim of truth is to liberate the self from a collective agreement to know the self through your past creations. And through the exercise that you just chose to agree with, you have given yourself permission to exist in a higher vibrational field. The choice was made for you by the Divine Self, the “I Am Self,” who claims this for you in consort with your will, and the agreement that was made by you now will have its benefits, and will be known to you in the times to come. When you have a vibrational shift, it takes time for the system itself to know itself in the higher octave it has claimed. The frequency may be felt, it may be known by you, but the benefits of it aren’t heralded until the manifestation can be made into form. Now as the one in form before us, we are watching you, we are watching the colors change in the field that you hold, we are watching the room you exist in transform to reflect the true nature of who and what you are, and the knowing we have of who you are is supporting you in manifesting this claim. We do have the
knowing of who you are, you see. Some of us have been you, or like you, or with you in prior incarnation. Others of us know ourselves only in love and without form. But the holding we have of who and what you are is done in love regardless of the level of frequency you hold. We see you as you are, not as you think you should be, or want to be, even. In some cases what you want to be is someone other than yourself, and we must tell you that aligning to the Divine Self does not mean you don’t crack your knuckles still, or continue with that irritating habit of scratching your nose when in conversation. You have things you have been born into, and things you have acclimated to, and habitual behaviors are ways of knowing the self that you have decided are part of who you are. And you may change what you like, yes, but the abandonment of the false self, or, we would say, the small self, is not a true act. The small self, or the personality self, is very useful still, as an aspect of who and what you are, so that you may know yourself in consort on this plane. What actually happens to the small self through this process is that she is aligned to her true nature, and the reidentification of the self in her glory is what transforms her world. Some of you decide that, perhaps, this is an exercise in self-abnegation, of self-loathing, “I hate who I am, let me be something other,” and that is not the case of this teaching at all. When we witness you, we actually love all aspects of you, all aspects of you, because there is nothing outside of the Creator as we can envision it. Now as you know yourselves in your density, you may align each aspect of your life to your highest truth, and that includes the knuckle bending and the nose scratching, if that is what you wish, but the true agenda here is the field you hold, the vibratory field that you hold, that will be imprinting within you its name, “I Am, I Am, I Am. I Am Here.” And in that claim, the justification of the small self to be the ruler of the Kingdom is diminished and the True Self calls into manifestation of what may be claimed as her true inheritance. If you can imagine a father, or a mother, if you wish, who sends her child away with a small dispensation, “Here is the money you need to go on this journey, and until you remember who I am, that I am the father, that I am the mother, and that we exist in consort, you may do as you like. As you recall yourself as an aspect of me, and we agree to know one another again, you actually have access to all that I have, all that I may offer, because it has always been yours, you just needed to remember. You just needed to remember that I am here.”
That is the teaching you are receiving, in some ways. And no, you were not punished by being sent away. In fact, the teaching of the prodigal child is this teaching. You had to reclaim the self in your divinity to know who the Father is, to know that you are of Source, to reap the bounty that was always present. This is not sitting very well with Paul, who doesn’t understand why people are hungry, why people suffer. “If this is the teaching, why must we suffer? We have been told we are loved, but we don’t feel loved. You are telling us we are cared for, but I don’t see the evidence of it in my world.” Here is the world you live in: Each man, each woman holds the memory of who she is in her DNA, in her being, in whatever way you want to claim it. We disuse the language of science because the language of science is born in fashion, and you will have new names for everything you know now in a thousand years. The truth of who you are, at your essence, is unchangeable. But as you are masked in form, the dispensation you are given as you enter this landscape is the memory that will be activated by you as you realize it through your own experience and choice and the dispensation of will, the right to choose what you get. So many of you understand yourselves only in consort with the physical realm. So you seek the physical realm to solve all your problems. When the physical realm no longer solves your problems, many of you go to the Spirit as the angry child, the frightened child, who seeks refuge, again, within the breast of the mother, the heart of the father, in union with the Divine. That is how you’ve chosen to learn. We did not teach you this. The responsibility of the individual self to align her own will to her Divine Self must be chosen for it to be in merit. Nobody comes to the Father, or the Mother, if you wish, unless they claim it and say, “Here I am.” As you present yourself at the altar of consciousness, “Here I am,” the Divine responds within you, “I am here.” This teaching you are receiving now, in many ways, is the teaching of the Creator as you, and that is why we call it the teaching of mastery. But this comes in time, in alignment and through an agreement that the Divine Self as you is the heir to the Kingdom, not the personality self who claims all the riches of the world and demands to be known in her True Self in a way that is actually bound by ego, or fear, or trust in the realm she sees before her at the negation of the Divine. As we continue, we will agree with you about many things, and what an agreement is is a going into an alignment with what is before one. There are
many things we agree with and are in alignment to that will be of great benefit to you. The landscape that you exist in, in many ways, as your teacher, the life you live as your teacher, shows you what you’ve agreed to thus far. The paint on the walls, yes, the pots on the stove, the husband beside you, the child at school, the man you know as your friend or your enemy, these are all ways of knowing the self in this incarnation, in this physical realm. The need you have now is to justify the passage that you are engaging in. “If I have only known myself in this realm, how do I choose it in a new way? I see the kitchen; I count on it to cook my food. I know where I put the pots and pans, yes, so what?” The illustration we are giving you about what you have agreed with simply means this is where you stand now, and the desire for more within the True Self, the echo of the Divine within you who seeks to realize herself in new ways, is being brought forward so that the transformation can commence. We would like you now to see the room before you, the room you sit in, and agree that everything that you chose, that you see before you, has served a purpose, one purpose of some kind that you chose to know the self with. As you look at the things, imagine yourself as agreeing to all of them, giving a nod to all these things, “Yes, I put the glass there on the counter,” “Yes, I read that book last week, I left it by the side of the bed,” “Yes, I chose the paint, and the window shade, or I said, okay, that’s what it is, it will stay,” but you understand yourself as agreeing with your prior creations. Now decide, if you wish, that everything you see before you is going to change, will change, will be transformed by the echo of consciousness you hold in your field. Everything you see before you in manifestation is temporary to the life you live in, the decade you exist in, or the century, or millennium, but it will always be changeable and changed. Here we go: “On this day I choose to know myself as the Infinite Spirit. On this day I choose to align myself to my true knowing of my true nature. And as I do this, I align every aspect of my life to align to me as a reflection of this, and the room I sit in, the landscape I see before me, will now become the reflection of who I truly am. And the choices that I will make will be to align this room, this landscape, this life that I exist in into an agreement with my Divine Nature, and ‘with’ means in consort with, in alignment with. And as I choose this, I give deep thanks for the heritage I hold, my
dispensation of choice, and my alignment to the Christed Self who may say, ‘Yes, I am here.’ I claim this in authority, as I know my Divine birthright. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.” Yes, yes, yes, yes, yes. And the “yes” we speak is the agreement to each one of you who took the step now to transform her world to agree to the world that may be brought to bear in her own lifetime, in her own wisdom, as she sees herself in her true nature. We understand you each as having individual needs, things you need to attend to in your lives. And we wish to give you some tools to begin to address the changes that you would like to see. The first step for any change is to see what is there and to realize that, for whatever reasons, you were party to its presence in its current form. Whatever tragedy you may be facing, or challenge, or difficulty, you are aligned to it and, consequently, it is in agreement with you as the woman you are, as the man you are, as a conscious being. That does not mean you are a victim to it. That does not mean you have to like it, or to want it, but it does mean you have to agree with it as a creation that you are party to. “Well, I didn’t make my child sick. I am not party to that creation.” You did not make him sick, but you are party to your engagement with the situation and your response, in many ways, is what you choose either in a higher way or through your old self, or the fear-based self, who seeks to run, or to fix, or to do, based on what she was taught prior. So we say this to you: Your agreement to say this, that you are in consort with this creation, actually empowers you to learn to attend to it in a higher way. If you disengage your own authority to this thing you see before you, you are not party to it as one who can change her mind and choose in a new way. So as you have decided this, that you are in agreement with the situation you see before you, you may now say these words: “I see myself in consort with this thing that I have agreed to know. And as I witness it, I learn through it. And as I release my need to be in consort with it, I give myself permission to rise above it and see it and witness it in a new way. As I choose this, I claim the possibilities that may be inherent in the unlearning of the behavior, the unattachment to the outcome that I have invested in prior that created or served my alignment to the situation. I am
willing to learn what I am required to learn to move me through it and above it so that I may be liberated from this attachment.” The choice you are making as you say these words is, quite simply, to reinvest as the witness to the situation in such a way that you can detach from the outcome or decision of what this thing is. Everything you see before you, high and low and in between, is a creation. And everything you see before you may be witnessed, once again, in a new way. As it is seen in a new way, the relationship you have with it is transformed. And as it is transformed, you disengage from the old way and you call into being that which exists in a higher octave. This is a system of re-creation. It is not a calling into manifestation of the new, and we will teach that shortly. You must understand, each one of you, that there is nothing that can be claimed by you, high and low and in between, that you are not in agreement with. So the moment you decide that you are a victim to something, you give it great power, it becomes your god, and you are in servitude to the false god of fear who would try to teach you who he is as the master of your world. Fear, we would say, in whatever guise it presents itself, is always a liar. There is nothing you could fear that is not meant to frighten you, and the action of fear is always to create more fear. As you disengage from the vibration of fear, what you actually do is claim the Kingdom, because the Kingdom actually exists without fear. Do you each understand that the Divine Self as you holds no fear? The Christ cannot be in consort with fear because it does not exist at that level of vibration. Is it possible to live here? Yes, it is. But you must decide for yourselves that you have the right and you are willing to let the self become liberated from the structures you have chosen that invite you to attend to the self as the one who is fearful. We will say this for Paul, who is questioning from the sidelines, “What were you teaching us? Were you teaching us how to create? What were you saying? I wasn’t following well.” It’s very good when you don’t follow. You can read the transcript later. But we will tell you this: What we are teaching is a realignment to systems of creation, and, in order to realign to a new system of creation, you must have means to liberate the self from the past creations, to invest in them in a new way so that they may be moved. In some ways, by looking at something, witnessing it for what it is and learning how to see it from a new vantage point, gives you the permission you require to embark on change.
Nothing can be changed until you agree that it can be, and nothing can be claimed by you until you first know it as something that can be so. We have taught you possibility in prior teaching; we have told you that nothing can be claimed until it is first known as a possibility, and that is still so. When you claim things, when you choose things, you must always inquire why you choose what you choose. What you get from it, in many cases, will be what you expect, but if you are looking to the physical realm to solve your problems, from here on you are going to be challenged in many ways. The claims that you have made thus far are actually designed to liberate you from the need for the physical realm to be the problem solver. That does not mean you do not exist here. That means, simply, that you realize that the physical realm is an echo of consciousness and, consequently, you go to the Divine Self as the Creative Self to support you in what is required to be transformed in the world you see before you. There are a few more things we wish to say today about what you need. The first thing that you actually need as you go on this journey with us is the willingness to say “yes” to what is not yet known. If you wait and have everything handed to you, examine each piece of food on the plate before you ingest it, you may do that, but, in fact, when you are eating a ten-course meal it is actually wise to taste the appetizer because by the time the final dish comes everything else will have grown cold. We are actually teaching you in sequence and there are things you require to understand, to know through each chapter that calls you forward in your own awareness of your invincibility as a Divine Being. The attachment to the physical realm, which is a transient realm, is the first thing we are attending to because unless you become unattached to this as your savior, you cannot liberate the self from the responsibility to claim the Divine in her wisdom. The Divine in her wisdom, who seeks to teach you, is here, is here, is here, but will not be claimed by you when you are trying to figure it out through the mechanisms of the material realm. The second thing we would like to say is that you are worthy of this. And you must remember this always: There is no man on this plane, no woman on this plane, who is higher than another. That is illusion. It’s what causes all kinds of trouble. It’s what keeps the beggar in the street and the rich man in his tower. You are all one being, really, experiencing yourself through individuated consciousness. But you rely upon one another in ways you can never know, and you may be in consort with those you may never meet on this plane, but you
have great times and great ways of knowing one another in the higher realms. The agreement to incarnate, in many ways, is simply the agreement to come into your knowing as the one in truth, as the one who is worthy of the Kingdom. The last thing we will say to you now is that you must not fear who you are. Whatever you have done, or thought you have done, whatever you have claimed in fear cannot be lifted as you are attached to it. We are going to give you a situation now to understand: When you have someone who believes himself to be dirty, he will always be running to be cleansed. Until you realize that you are truly clean, that the essence of you is unsoiled, you will always know the self in another way. We will tell you this: You are clean, you are free, you are loved, you are known by us in your pure sense of being. We honor this and, if you would like to see us before you now, in any way you like, we would like to open our arms to you and embrace you in frequency. As we do this with you, as we align to you wherever you sit, we would like to hold your vibration, and as we hold the frequency that you are, we are going to liberate you from the sense of selfloathing, or fear of being the self that you may have held. We ask for your permission now to be embraced, to be resolved, to be cleansed of the self who believes she is dirty and cannot be welcomed to the altar with her dirty feet. You are clean as you are, you are loved as you are, and you have the right to be welcomed to the altar that stands between you and all the wonder that will be. We invite you now with us to place upon this altar anything you wish to leave here. Whatever shame, whatever fear, whatever hunger for fame, or debasement, or change that is born in fear, we invite you to leave it at the altar before you. And as we stand next to you here, we sponsor you on your journey. We know who you are, what you are, and how you serve. We will leave you now, and we will take you next up the mountain. Thank you for your presence and good night. Period, period, period.
Day Seven* Now we ask you this: If you came into this form with one question, what might it be? If you were born into a body with one question, what might that question
be? And we will ask you to ask yourselves this, “If I had one question for who I am in this lifetime, what would it be?” The question we would offer you as in response to this would be a very simple one. “What am I, in this body, in this expression, in this life that I live? What am I?” Now “what” means in form. In fact, you are spiritual beings and you know yourself thus, and here you find yourself in a physical body encountering all sorts of things in a dense level of vibration that bears no resemblance to what you believe should be there in your memory of unity with the Divine. Because you all come into place with a memory of the unity that you once had, yourself in consort with All That Is, and the reacclimation to the Divine Self as you, “I am a Divine Being in this body,” in many ways, is counter to your experience here. You know yourself in flesh and bone. You see the one beside you and all your judgments of who they are. And the reckoning you have now is “What am I? Am I a spiritual being? Is this true or am I really just a man, am I just a woman encountering herself in all of these things I see before me?” The question is a very good one, and we wish to answer it tonight. And we say this to Paul, it may be in the book, but that is our decision. The teaching of unity, which we are continuing with, which we left him with two days ago, in many ways is paramount to the text we are working on. But your individual needs, “What am I?” must be encountered for you to discern what it means to be you in different dimensional levels of knowing. Now the aspect of you that has been born in a body has come to learn. Like it or not, you have come to learn, and you grow and you evolve through all of your experiences. All of them. That means the ones you don’t like, the ones you didn’t want, the ones you say you would never choose. They are all part of your path, and if you see his hands, he is calling things to him in high regard.* The Divine Self calls into being what she requires, what he requires, to know himself through, and much of life, you see, is an encounter with the unknown. If it was all known, what the hell would you be learning? You are learning many things, including what it is like to be afraid, to be separate so you may reclaim yourself as unafraid and in union with the great I Am, the Divine Source, the Source of who you are and All That Is. But the forgetting of the union that you come to when you are born in a body has serious ramifications, because as you come into form here, you are reminded of
separateness by a system that has been put in place for a very long time to tell you you are not one with the Divine. Now we will explain this for you: This system was not put in place by us, but by yourselves. As you increase in density, as you understand the sky from the clouds and not the sun behind it, you forget the sun behind it and you believe that the appearance of the cloud is solid and will be manifested in form. And so you build a life that defies the sunlight and respects the cloud, and that is existing in a field of separation. Now we call it a field not because it’s a permanent thing, but because it’s been agreed upon by mankind for so very long that she must now reach above it to call the light to her, to say, “Yes, I am here. I am of this thing. And as I am of this thing, and I know myself as such, I call into manifestation the True Being that I am.” Now we use the sun intentionally as a metaphor because the sun is always present. Even when you do not feel it, when it is dark, it is still present somewhere, and the Source of who you are is always present as well. What you are, here and now, in many ways is a system in engagement with his or her own evolution as the one who knows who she is. Paul is saying, “Did you just call us systems?” Well, perhaps we did. But what we mean by that is aspects of you in acclimation with your fellows, in consort with systems of agreement borne throughout time. Mankind, in many ways, has supported separation, and as you are deciding now to be who you truly are, you call into manifestation, which means physical form, the triumph of the Christed Self that may be born again as you. “Christed Self” is the term we like, but you may substitute it with what you like. The Divine aspect of you that is born in form as you, that seeks its expression as and through you, is the Christ, and the identity of that self you may call the Christed Self or the True Spirit of your being, or the Divine Spark or Fred, or Jilly, or any name you prefer. What you claim very, very simply, is you are of something greater and that the seed of that thing in its manifestation will bloom as and through you. Now the life you are expressing as is the demonstration of this, but it is also the demonstration of one who is born in the density of experience on this plane, and the alignment you hold to the Divine Self, in many ways, does not seem to express through the lower vibrations you encounter yourself through.
Now we will say this to you: Because the Divine supersedes the lower realm, the lower realm is subject to the laws of the spiritual and not the other way around. The Divine operates outside of time, outside of your understanding of the world you live in, but it is knowing the density of form and can support you in rising through the clouds to meet the sun that would shine through you. Now as we teach you, we must encounter you in form: “Look at that man there with all his challenges. He seeks to revenge his jealousy upon another. He looks to the physical world to manifest for him the gun that he needs to shoot the lover.” “Look at that woman, she prays for money but then she hides her pennies. She does not trust the Divine to show her more. Regardless of her prayers, she seeks to find her worth through material gain.” Now each of you is guilty of this, in one degree or another, and the reason for this is very simple: You see physical manifestation, it’s all around you. “The world is mad!” you say and, in fact, it may be. But the Divine Self that is present also understands the transient nature of the physical realm and understands very well that it is malleable to Divine thought expressed through you. The action of the Divine, you see, that may be met through you in your world, is always in consort to the truth of who you are, regardless of what you believe through your identification as a small physical being without recourse to the truth in all situations. “What is the truth,” he is asking, “in all situations? Is this the solution to our problems?” No, you are the solution to your problems as you realign to the Source of who you are. What you do instead is go back to the physical realm to assume responsibility for your creations without the knowing that you may require to solve an issue, or re-create and lift your circumstance in a higher way. Now in alignment many things may be so, and by alignment we mean in awareness and congruence of the things you see before you. If you understand, first and foremost, that anything that has been manifested was manifested for a reason and not arbitrarily, you can also understand that the need for anything has merit in some way, even if it’s based in a lower thought or a lower agreement. “The only way I may meet my needs is to steal what I need” is just a lower way of meeting a requirement. The impulse to meet the need is a high need, maybe a true need, but the understanding that may be required to call a higher way forward may not be presented by you as your consciousness. So you do not deny yourself, your lower nature, you rise above it to support great change.
The arbitrary nature that you assume is there, “Everything happens by accident, there is no recourse, we are stuck on this plane without a solution,” is simply another way to defy the Divine Self, to decide in advance that the world that you exist in and through will not be changed. Here we are tonight in a gathering of energy, in an awareness of one another here in this form. As we operate through the man Paul, we have to respect the form he stands in. He has a dense vehicle; when the body is injured, he cannot work as well. We must support the agreement of those of you who come into form to nurture the body, to be fed and to be housed, to be gifted with what you need to live a life that may demonstrate the teachings. We do not wish you anything but what you need to be realized through. But in a dense form you still have resource and access to the higher teachings. As you become a beam of frequency—a beam of frequency means the aspect of you that is the Divine is actually reaching to the heavens, or the higher vibratory fields, or dimensions, if you prefer, some of you like that name—it is present as you, and you become the conduit for the Divine. And as you do this, the broadcast you hold, the physical vehicle you hold, is also transformed to the level of alignment that’s required to hold the energy. As we teach you in this way, we are also supporting the physical vehicle in its transformation. And what that means is where you hold density, or an unwillingness to change, where you have calcified fear, or frustration, the desire for revenge, the need to hoard, these aspects of you, that are part of your being, in a physical being, will be challenged, and the vibration you hold will be met with the light that is required to transform it. You must understand this. You cannot pray to the light and then ask to hide the first time the light comes, and so many of you do this because you are actually frightened of the change that you are seeking. “Why are they frightened?” he asks.* Because they do not know what lies beyond the clouds that they are so used to seeing in the dense field you have identified yourselves as and through. What is beyond the field? All That Is, and the Kingdom, if you wish, and the Kingdom, as we teach you again and again, is the awareness of the Creator in all manifestation. He is asking a good question; we will respond. “So we see somebody before us, they are frightened, they are in dense frequency. How do we meet them as this light that we are, that you say that they are?”
Here is the simple response: They are not in dense frequency. They assume themselves to be, just as you do. An aspect of each one of you, everyone we would say, knows a unity that comes into being with them. It is the memory of the Source you are evolved from. So the witnessing of the one before you, not in their density, but in their union, will transform them in a high way. “I want to help that poor woman. She is in such need. I am afraid she will never get it right” is your prescription for keeping her in her small self. “I see the woman before me, may she remember who she is. May I know myself as I truly am so I may remember her as she truly is. I am Word through the one I see before me. I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve.” This is the key to heal them. Not to blame them. Not to tell them that they’re sinful, or stupid, or may never know the truth unless they do as you do. You have no reason or right to prescribe somebody else’s path, but to witness her as she is —“I know who you are as a Divine Being, I know what you are as your True Self, I know how you serve as you are truly expressed in fullness”—will support her in her realignment to her own Christed Self and you do not need to use these words aloud. You are recognizing what is always there. Do you all understand this, yes? The union that you seek is here, is here, is here, and for everyone beyond the density of the clouds that you have all created to justify yourselves as separate from the light. Here we go. Please, you will say this with us in consort with our intention for each of you present. “On this night I choose to know who I am in my union with the Divine. As I know myself in union, I realize the union of all mankind and I deny any evidence of separation that would choose to present itself to keep me from my knowing of my worthiness of my union with my Source. As I claim these words, I am supported by the vibration of the Christed Self, or the Divine Self, that would gift me with the awareness I require in manifestation, meaning physical form. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here. I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.”
This is your gift tonight, my friends. The frequency you have claimed will be in support with you as a holding field, a holding in your own vibratory field as you align to it. Paul is asking for an illustration: “Why are my hands being held this way?”* This is the field holding the individual self as a mold, if you wish, as an understanding of the vibration of union. As we hold it for you, as we hold it for all of you, you may align to it, and as you express it, the mold may leave. You do not need our holding. You need to gift the world with the holding you can align to for the ones you see. When we teach you mastery, we don’t do this for you as individual students. We have long been saying we are the teacher of teachers. And as we teach the teachers, we understand that the teachers will embody the teaching as the expression of their field. As you become the expression of the field—“I am here, I am here, I am here” is the claim of the Divine Self as you in her resurrected state, expressing as and through you—you become a beacon of light, the emissary of the sun, or the Christ, if you wish, in this field, the unified, collective field that you all agree to hold. Now the density of the field will be lifted by this response. It is a collective effort and it is done by many, but not an effort that requires heavy lifting, an effort that requires alignment and agreement to being. “I am here, I am here, I am here” is a teaching of being, and the Divine as you, in her alignment, knows the needs of the ones she encounters. Paul asks a question: “Define what you mean by ‘teacher’.” That is a good enough question to answer. You may be different kinds of teachers, but there is no one born who is not teaching their own frequency. You must understand this: As you are always in expression, you are always a teacher. The child at school learns far more through the feelings she has around a teacher than the words on the blackboard. The man at work knows far better about how he is esteemed by his colleagues by how he understands himself with them than by the data on an annual report. You are always teaching your fellows. Now the energy field you hold, that we have been imprinting to support you in this exchange of manifestation of the Divine through the acclimation and attunement to the frequencies we offer you, is a teacher in another way. As you show another in your auric field that you can be done at this level, that you can be in response at this level of frequency, you actually show them on a level of congruence and expression that it may be acclimated to. So your very presence becomes the manifestation, the thing, the thing, the thing that will support them
in lifting their own fields. In language, you can say, you may discuss the work. You may share the teachings. But the language of the work, while beneficial, is simply there to support the vibration. Now there is no one here in this engagement with us who is unworthy of this. There is no one made in this level of manifestation on this plane who is without the Divine. But the awakening to the True Self, which is present as you through the claims you have been working with with us, “I am Word through my body, Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration, Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word, Word I am Word,” will be met by the life you live. Now as we ask you this now: As we give you this teaching, we will offer to you that the life that you live in offering to service, which means being the True Self in the highest expression, the “what” you are, yes, in high expression, is present not just for your own well-being, but for the good of all. And if you wish to offer yourself in service, we would invite you, at this juncture, to claim this after us: “On this night I choose to offer myself to my highest awakening of my ability to serve and in service I know the worth of my fellow man. In service I live, and abide by the light that I know myself as and through, and in service I gift all aspects of myself, all the gifts I have been given, to serve the Kingdom and the awareness of the presence of the manifestation of the Creator in all mankind. I choose this of my own free will and I say ‘yes,’ I say ‘yes,’ I say ‘yes’ to all that may come to me as I align to this.” The “mudra of creation,” which we will address in subsequent chapters, will be known by you now as a way to know that the vibration you hold as a conduit is always claiming. The gesture of the man before you may be mimicked by you but, in fact, what he is doing is the action of all frequency. You are always a conduit, you are always claiming, and as you said “yes” to the service that you will know, you must expect to receive it. We thank you each for your presence. We will soon go to your questions. We must say this for Paul: We would like to include this in the text, in “Union.” We thank you all for your presence and participation. Here we are, all of us together. Please say this after us:
“I am Word through my body, Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration, Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word, Word I am Word. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here. I am Word through all that I see before me, Word I am Word. And I am Word through this claim of mastery. I know who I am, what I am, how I serve.” Thank you each for your presence, we will resume in a moment with questions on the teaching.* Period. Period. Period.
Q: When I hear this, I feel my heart expand and express, and then there’s something that conflicts, and part of me wants to know about allowing those walls to break down . . . We will say this: There is no agreement, when you are born, that you should be separate. Do you understand this? You are acclimating to it. You are taught to be afraid, you are taught to be defended. It is not a natural state. Do you understand this? The natural state is to be in union. When you see an infant, she knows exactly who she is, and everybody else as well. She has not been disciplined or indoctrinated into an agreement of separation. Now the individualization of the self—you must know your own name, “In this lifetime I am such and such”—is a good enough way to know the self. The experience you are having of expansion is realizing that it is possible to accept everyone without a damn agenda of who they should be, which gets you off the hook just as well. Do you understand this? You all have a right to be as you are, just as you are, and everything else is agreement to compromise. He has a question; we must take it.* “Don’t we need to compromise some days? If we are in the movie theater, we agree to stay quiet for the movie.” Yes, you do. You are all choosing that collectively for the good of the whole and you may continue to choose collectively for the good of the whole. But you must understand that the compromise we teach you, “We will compromise our individuality to serve the need for somebody else’s expectations of who and what we are supposed to be,” is actually a way to support separation, not inclusion. Thank you for the very good question.
Q: As I am lifted to an awareness of the Divine as me, what does it feel like? What is the energetic of it, that lets you know, “Oh, wow, there it is!” You love rules, you want to be told what to feel so you can affirm yourself, “I must be doing it right because I am feeling what I am supposed to feel,” and this is a frame that you are expressing through. We will tell you this: When you know who you are at this level of vibration, your perception is altered. It is a perception of what you see, and what you call to you when you are no longer damning the one next to you, expecting things to go your way because you think they should, but knowing that things are as they need to be, you will be there. Perception, we say, is part of our instruction, and the eyes in your head may be aligned to the sight of the Divine through your expression. Your senses, in many ways, are how you experience yourself in consort with all things so, in some ways, they are the vehicles that you will be taught through in your own experience. But please, please, please do not codify this teaching—“It should be a certain way because the general said so”—and that is the attitude, in some ways, of one who seeks regimentation of a teaching that is inclusive. There are so many ways to be awake. There are so many names of God. The word we use is “Christ.” On an island somewhere, where they have never heard the term, they have their own term for the same thing. You must understand that a teaching that is true is always true, in any culture, with any language attached to it. But how you all experience something, and we mean all of you, will be filtered through your experience. If you’ve been given a name for something that you once thought was so, the inclination is to name it when you think you see it again. Experience, in some ways, spiritual experience, cannot be named. No one who ever holds it is shouting it from the rooftops. They are so impressed by it and so in love with the Source of it that all they can do is be. Codification of a teaching is rarely a beneficial thing. Now we are teachers, yes, and we work with texts, yes, but the primary effort of our texts is to teach you in alignment with the frequency that works through us and you. Understand this: The language is there to support the vibration, not the other way around. The vibration is not the impact of the language; the language is there to serve the vibration to support your own understanding and ability to work with it. Thank you for the question.
Q: My question is about boundaries. On the one hand, I really believe what your guides are saying so much and yet I see myself constantly having to say “no” to somebody or keep somebody away, and I am sometimes at a loss to figure out how this all will work together. Thank you for the question. Here is the answer: The boundaries you require are actually impressed by you in circumstance. But to be in boundary —“Don’t step on my foot, please”—is very different than putting a wall around yourselves when you walk down the boulevard to ensure that nobody steps on you. When somebody encroaches your field with their own requirement from you and they are not operating in their own autonomy, you may very well decide that you are sealed because you cannot deplete your own field to support that of another. That does not mean you do not bless them, or be in an awareness of their own true nature. In some ways, your own knowing will be the director here. He is asking for a hard-and-fast rule and we will say there is not one.* When you have a need for separation that is born in circumstance—“The man in the restaurant beside me has decided to eat off my plate; this is my food”— you may have a choice. You may choose to offer your food, or you may say, “Get your own damn food; I am eating now, thank you.” You are not disavowing him, you are simply saying, “You have encroached my boundary, thank you very much; I am not available for this.” You are not denying the divinity in him, but at the same time you are operating in a shared responsibility of respect. When you are not being respected for who you are, that is when you feel encroached. Do you have a right to be respected? Yes. You do not have the need, though, to build a wall to protect the self. You can simply say, “Thank you, my friend, buy your own food.” Now he doesn’t like the illustration: “We should be feeding the man next to us.” If you can, yes, but he may be overeating anyway. He just may have bad manners. He may have plenty of food on his own plate. Don’t disrupt the teaching. When you have somebody who requires food, yes, feed the one beside you, but that was not the illustration. Thank you very much for the question.
Q: Are there any kinds of practical, on-the-ground things that we should be either keeping in mind during the course of the day other than the “I am Word”
affirmations? Are there little—I don’t want to say, tricks—but maybe tricks or tips, for instance? Thank you for the word. “Tricks” is a very good word for what this teaching is not. In fact, this is a discipline. This is not an easy teaching. It’s an alignment. And the maintaining of alignment is an action you must choose. The claim “I am Word through the thing I see before me”—the situation, whatever it may be—will support your alignment, yes. But when you are challenged by a situation and you move out of alignment, you at least are learning what is calling you out of alignment, so it’s an opportunity for growth. As your day progresses, you actually may learn how to monitor your field. If you see the hand before you, he is spinning a radio dial.* As we have said in the past, you are all radios, playing a broadcast. If you wish to change a broadcast, simply do it and change your mind. Your mind, in many ways, is what calls the broadcast into manifestation. The vibration of the Word, the “I Am Presence” as you, is a frequency, or a current, that may be expressed as and through you. But there is no tricking here. What we have done, in many ways, through the attunements we have gifted you with is actually play the radio at a whole new level. We have attuned the radios you are to a new broadcast that you may know yourselves as and through. Thank you for the question.
Q: How can I really stand in my knowing, and know that I am really acting from a place of love? Should I act, should I not act, should I do, should I not do? I find myself feeding the fear . . . You have to learn to trust yourself. That’s the only issue here. And some of that is alignment, and some of that is not criticizing the self when you fall short of your ideals. When you criticize the self, or condemn the self for not being where you think you should be, you actually incur that response, which is to lower your vibration. Now one of the ways you learn, yes, is by falling and learning how to pick yourself up again. So there’s no need to criticize the child who is learning to walk upon two feet; every effort should be applauded by the parent. “Look at
that child! He is learning to walk! He fell on his bottom! Oh, how lovely! There he goes—he’s back up on his feet! He’s not crying—he’s proud—he’s walked two steps!” Then you forget what it was like to learn to walk and the expectation is you will be walking all the time. In some ways, the process that you are engaging now in is very comparable. It takes some time, yes, to become comfortable with a teaching, or an exercise, or a discipline, if you like, but to harm the self for not being where you think you should be never supports you in growth. Do you understand this, yes?
Q: I drive a bus for a living, and I acknowledge people and acknowledge the Divine and send them my love. Am I doing what I need to do, besides that witnessing and speaking the affirmations in my own spiritual practice? Besides reading through the texts and speaking the words, is there anything else that I need to be doing? Be, be, be. This is about being. It’s not about parroting language. You call them affirmations. Many of you call them affirmations. The publisher calls them an affirmation. In fact, what they are are claims of truth. Everything we teach you to utter is a claim of truth. As you are claiming your truth in this manner, you call it into manifestation. These are never magic words. They do correlate to frequency, yes, but if they are empty in intention, you will not gain the same benefit. Now Paul is saying, “But I claim I am Word through my body. I feel the vibration, but I do not know myself as Word.” It’s still true, regardless of what you think. The Divine Self, or the I Am Self, or the Christed Self knows who she is, and that is the Word, “I am Word through my body, I am Word through my vibration, I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word.” You are not claiming your personality self as the Divine Self, you are giving the Divine Self the authority to be you in fullness. Now we will answer your other question, “What else do I do?” Be, be, be. The claim “I am here” is the claim of mastery. When you claim, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” you are calling the Divine Self to her purview,
the expression of the Christed Self as how you be. This will support all areas of your life. You require the first two teachings, yes, the teaching of the vibration to the Word and the claim of identity, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” to be in alignment for this. We welcome you to your bus and all who may be blessed to enter it. Do you understand this? If you can hold the frequency of the vibration of the Word in the bus and fill every alignment to it, every bit of it to the light that you are, all who enter will be blessed. We thank you for the question. Period.
— Go in peace. Never use these teachings to hurt yourself. Never use these teachings to demand something of somebody else. Let the teachings be there to support you in your alignment, your development, and your freedom of choice. We are your teachers, yes. We are not your masters. We do not wish that. We wish you to be in your own mastery. We know who you are, we know what you are, we know how you serve. We are Word through the ones we see before us. Thank you each, and good night. Stop now, please.
CHAPTER FOUR
I SEE WITH THE EYES OF THE CHRIST Day Eight*
N
ow we offer you this: The lives you’ve lived thus far have been in agreement with you. We’ve taught you this already. Everything you see before you, you have been in agreement with; it could not be there without. So if we accept this as a precept, we will take you to the next step. “What begins to happen? Will I begin to claim a new life through the new identity I know, ‘I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve’?” Who are you then, when you’ve reidentified as your True Self, the Divine as you? What does it mean to have claimed this, and incarnated at this level of agreement? We will tell you what it does not mean. It does not mean you are not yourselves. But what it does mean is that the Divine as you, in her full expression, claims the identity and aligns you to all the things she needs to be expressed through. So the small self, you see, who has named herself in small ways, goes into an alignment with the agreement of the True Self to say, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” and the claim she makes, “I am here,” claims benediction on all she sees before her. You must understand that the Divine as you has its own sight and the vision she holds, the eyes in her head, what she perceives, is a different life than you perceive yourself as living. The Divine as you, in her way, will claim the purview of all she sees. Now when we teach you this, you must first understand that your perception is something that you are in agreement with. You look around the room you’re in. Everything there you said “yes” to, “I chose the clock on the wall,” “My marriage chose the pictures in the dining room,” whatever you claim, you can
agree you were accepting, were in choice on some level. Your perception, you see, is your purview, and when you see with the eyes of the Christ, or the eyes of the Divine, what you are lifting to is a vision of what’s before you that can only be in truth. Now you must understand this concept: “Can only be in truth” means that it’s true. And what is not true is fear, what is not true is hatred, and what is not true is an agreement to harm the self or another for any reason. You must understand that these things exist in lower vibration and, consequently, are not in alignment with the eyes of the Christ. Now we use that term intentionally. The eyes of the Christ hold the vision of the Divine Self. You may use others’ language if you prefer, you may substitute the name if you like, but the conceit is a very simple one. As we have named the Christ as the aspect of the Creator that may be born as you, the Divine Self that is here at the inception of your soul incarnating as you, what she sees is the manifestation of God. Now Paul is getting in the way: “Well, that’s all very good. But they’re all going to say, ‘What happens when I see something that I know is not good? When I see poverty, when I see war, how do I witness them then?’” and that is a very good question. The alignment that you will hold will allow you comprehension at a very different level than you are attending to now. Anything you see before you, high and low and in between, is a creation of man. And what man makes, one is in accord with. When you lift above the vision of fear, you are not in consort with fear. We will tell you very simply: The idealization of fear, “I need my fear, my fear protects me,” calls fear to you. So you can witness anything and be in consort with fear, “Look at that little dog, she is so cute!” “Look at that little dog, he is going to bite me!” You have the right to decide for yourself how you are in agreement. Now when we say you are not in alignment with fear that does not mean that you do not witness things that, perhaps, you would have decided in your old life, through the old identity, or the fear-based self, should be frightening. The difference is you have moved away from that alignment and it doesn’t resonate or replicate through you, finally, as something fearful. When you perceive something that you perceive as unjust, you may see the truth in the situation: that all the parties there are in recognition, at one level or another, of who and what they are and they are choosing circumstance on some level of agreement.
Now he doesn’t like this answer, either:* “Who chooses to be hurt?” Well, he does it all the time, and so do all of you, and an insult or an axe are varying degrees of pain and experience. So much of what you perceive here is judged by your expression of a world where you have been taught degree. Finally, we would say that anything that befalls anybody is an opportunity to grow, high and low, and whatever you claim at any of these levels you are in consort with. So to the degree you know yourself as a Divine Being—and we claim the word “know” intentionally, it cannot just be an idea, a proclamation that has no substance to it, it must be true—as you claim this in truth, you are recreated in a new way and your world will begin to reflect it. What it means, truly, is you are no longer in consort with the idealization of fear and the creations of fear that mankind has known herself through. You must all understand that a collective creation has been made by all of you at a higher level to move this frequency to the next level of incarnation of the species you are in. Mankind is at a level of awakening, and the resistance to the awakening is causing some mayhem that may be attended to through physical experience, or can be chosen to be realigned with in a higher way. You actually don’t know that you have choices here. How you attend to the little dog who is so cute or may bite is entirely up to you, and how you deal with a world that may be lifting or crumbling is up to you as well. Either one will give you a vastly different experience of yourself, and everything you see around you is a reflection of this. The Divine as you who knows who she is also knows her purview as a creative act. You are in a creative act every time you see anything, did you know this? You are interpreting data and deciding for the self what it means. And how the interpretation is called to you is through the replication of what you have been taught prior or what you may claim in a new way. The claim “I am here, I am here, I am here” is the trumpet that will sing as your frequency, and it calls you into the moment fully expressed as the Divine Self, and what she sees will be in accord with her truth. And there’s that word again, yes, “truth.” Now Paul is asking, “Well, if I see someone before me and I don’t like them very much, is that my truth?” That is not your truth. Your decision to judge another is your choice, that is the truth, but you are not perceiving the truth in who that other being is. If you were to perceive that truth, you would identify with them as an aspect of the Divine Self; there is no one born who is not of this vibration.
Some of you know this; some of you don’t want to know it. “Who am I if I don’t judge, if I don’t decide those people are wrong?” “Who am I to say that other people will change? They won’t change. Mankind will never change.” If that is your choice, that is what you claim, but don’t for a minute name it as anything other than what you are claiming and in accord with. Truth, we say, is a vibration, and the aspect of the Creator is a vibration seeking to express through you as truth. “I am aligning to truth” is a claim you may make, and as you claim it, you call into manifestation the knowing you need to see what is true. He is asking, “But do we first need to see it—the levels of creation, the judgment we hold—before we understand the Divine that is present in all things?” Perhaps you do. If you’ve lived a life where you’ve had to judge everybody to feel safe as yourself, that judgment has served a very good purpose. You have invested in it as a way to stay safe. How you align to a new truth, “I am a Divine Being,” manifests in your ability to understand and comprehend first and foremost that all others must, perhaps, be the same thing. But the conjecture of that is an enormous first step for somebody who has been in such fear, whose vision has been precluded by judgment born in shame, born in experience where she was taught to believe that in order to stay safe she must judge her fellows. But the truth of the situation, all men, all women, regardless of what they see, what they are perceived as, what you see as you in them, is an aspect of the Creator manifested in form. As we say truth is, truth may be understood in varying degrees. “I don’t look good in that hat” may be truthful to you but, again, it’s a decision and nothing more. Here is a truth: The Divine as you is ever present as you regardless of what you think—and that is always the key—regardless of what you think. You think you are not Divine. You think you are your fear. You think you are what happened to you. And you think the one beside you is this or that as well, and none of it is true. It’s a way of knowing the self in interaction on the physical plane, but it holds a lower vibration. When you begin to perceive yourself as an aspect of the Divine, “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve,” and you claim this as your truth, as what you are aligning as and manifesting as, the claim “I am here, I am here, I am here”—the claim of mastery, yes—may be known by you, and in that claim you align yourselves to a sight of the light in all things. You understand, yes, that when you see the light, you see the truth, and the light dispels the darkness, the fear, the shame, the small manifestations of mankind that are trying to be regarded as true. They are not true. They are
manifestations of consciousness that will not be here in a hundred years. It’s all transient, you see. As you know yourselves in your true way, the Christed Self who has eyes to see will begin to perceive. And here is the claim we teach you: “I am seeing with the eyes of the Christ.” Now the eyes of the Christ hold no judgment, do not perceive in fear, has no investment in being right or making another wrong. She knows who she is, she is unafraid, and, consequently, what she sees is the perfection that is inherent in all things. And we said “all things” intentionally and that includes death that you are all so frightened of. If you could understand the inherent beauty in the transition you would all make eventually, you would not be afraid, but so much has gone into protecting the self, and the manifestations of the self, that you can’t even see who you are. The Christ as you, who will be known by you as you attend to this teaching, has a name, “I Am Here,” and in this proclamation she brings her witness to all things she sees. To all things, not just the things that she was told were good, that she expects to see in Christ. The ruination of a life may also be seen in its innate perfection. The Divine Self does not judge a thing, she sees the Creator in all before her. You are actually taught that what is high and what is low are differentiated: Some things are of God, some things are not. If all is God, God is all, and that means all things, not just what you have decided is a good thing. That is highly subjective. So many of you come here on this plane to learn lessons that you require for your evolution, and when they happen you run screaming from the room, “There cannot be a Creator, look at this predicament!” The predicament you are experiencing may be exactly what you require to demonstrate yourselves through so you may know yourself in a higher way. You may choose new ways to learn at any moment, and suffering is not a way we recommend you learn your lessons. Some of you believe you need it, but you don’t. As you begin to understand the Divine as you can prosper—and by “prosper” we mean encourage you to full manifestation—you will stop being so frightened at what circumstance brings. What circumstance brings at any occasion is a new opportunity to know yourself in encouragement of the Divine as you, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.” Now to see the self as the Divine Self requires you to believe on a very basic level that you are worthy of this. So we will attend to you all now with this claim
of truth: You are worthy of this because you are here. If you were not here, and we mean here in a body, in this life, in this expression, if you were not here, you would still be worthy. But the claim “I am here,” the manifestation of God in man, means you have the right to choose, and in choice you may claim your Divine birthright. The Christ as you is here, is here, is here. And she will be known, he will be known, if you prefer, as you say, “Yes, I may.” “Yes, I may choose. Yes, I may claim. Yes, I may sing this song of my inheritance. I see all things before me with the eyes of the Christ.” What this means for each of you is that what you perceive will begin to lift to an awareness of the Divine in all manifestation. You cannot pretend you see with the eyes of Christ when you want to hit somebody in the nose. You may acknowledge that you do, and acknowledge that you are frightened, and that the response you are having is a historical response based in what you’ve known. You don’t have to like anybody, you see. This is not about personalities. It is about the truth that will always be. “I see the one before me with the eyes of the Christ” lifts the one before you in her vibration to the perception you are claiming. You are giving an enormous gift. This is not a test to see how evolved you are, “Oh, I could see that man I can’t stand with the eyes of the Christ—I must be so very happy at my spiritual awakening!” This is not what it is. Here is what it is: a great and deep awareness of the inherent worth in all life. In all life. In all life. The sacrilege you know yourself through is the debasement of life, that one man is worth good and another is not. That one man may live well, and another should not, and some may choose love and some deserve hate. You must all understand that this is an equalizer; “I see the one before me with the eyes of the Christ” is a lifting to truth, and truth, we say, is eternal. The one you see before you is always Divine. She may be living a life you don’t agree with, would choose to forget, but she still has the right and because she does, because she has the right to be she is, as she is, a Divine Being. “I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve, you are here, you are here, you are here” is a gift, a benediction, and an act of great love.
When you claim, “I know who you are,” you are claiming, “I witness the Divine in you, what you are in this circumstance, in this expression you have chosen.” “I know how you serve,” how you are expressed in your truth as the Divine Being you must truly be, can only be, must only be. “You are here, you are here, you are here” claims them in their awakening, and what a gift of love. As you decide this, that you have a right to be just as you are, you know it’s so for all mankind. “I see with the eyes of the Christ, of the Divine Self, of the aspect of the Creator that I am manifested as and through” lifts the world you see before you to the glory of the Kingdom, and the Kingdom, as we have taught, is the awareness of the Creator in all manifestation. It is always here but must be seen by the eyes that know only truth. “Can this be done?” some of you are asking. It actually is done now. An aspect of you attending to these words already knows the truth and is saying, “Yes, I know. And as I know, I align. And in this alignment I allow myself to see what I see in its truth. I see with the eyes of the Christ.” We will stop in a moment. We will say yes, this will be in the text in its way and we will offer you all this: You are party to a manifestation, to a teaching that will not change only you, but change all that you encounter. This is no small thing. Your participation in this act of manifestation will actually impact all things you see. Now look around you. See the room you’re in and say these words, “I am seeing with the eyes of the Christ,” and see what you see. We know who you are, we know what you are, we know how you serve, you are here, you are here, you are here. We bless you each for your participation and we say this to you now: You are the Christ in manifestation when you know who you are, all of you and everyone, and that is the gift of the Kingdom as you. Thank you each and stop now, please. We will return with questions in a moment.
Q: I work in a situation which feels like its foundation is perpetuating the fearbasedness of our society, and I recently said a prayer as I started work, and I
heard within myself, “I choose not to do this anymore,” and it feels like it’s not in alignment with the vibration that I want to hold. Then, of course, fear arises because it’s my livelihood, and I wonder if there’s some guidance about taking the leap as we look to embody this higher vibration more fully so that our livelihood reflects more of who we fully are? Ask her this: Are you willing to know yourself outside of the fear that you are standing in? That is actually the testament to your truth. Now you can say, “I am going to leave this job, this is not in my truth,” but the fact of the matter is, if you may know who you are in this circumstance, you may transform the very thing you want to leave. Do you understand this? The idealization of who we are supposed to be, “I should be in work where I am valued and very happy,” may be very true, but you also may have an opportunity here to lift the environment in a way you will not know until you see it. Now you have a choice here. We are not saying to stay, but what we are saying is the idealization of comfort is, in some ways, a dilemma because in many ways the opportunities for growth are brought to you in your discomfort. Do you understand this? Now we will offer you this: When you know who you are—“I know who I am as a Divine Being, I know what I am in this expression”—“I know how I serve” will be the claim that brings you where you need to be, and this is not done in the intellect, “Ah, I have a good idea of better employment.” That may be a very nice idea, perhaps inspired, yes, but the fact of the matter is when you claim, “I know how I serve,” you are actually calling the higher frequency, the higher wisdom, to bear on the situation to bring you where you need to be. If you wish to leave your job, you may; if it is not in consort with you, go where you are in consort. But this is for all of you: Opportunities come in very different ways. It is much easier to shine the light on people you like and agree with and it’s much more productive to do it elsewhere. Do you understand this, yes? He is asking a question:* “Is there anything she can do at her place of employment?” Yes, in fact there is. “I see the ones before me with the eyes of the Christ” bears witness to their truth, not to their goodness, to their holiness in a way you would prescribe, or another might, but to their inherent worth. When you discuss the ones you work with, do it in ways that value the integrity of who
they truly are and not the distortion they may be operating in. When you honor the distortion, you reinforce the distortion.
Q: In regards to standing in judgment of your fellow man, what about evil people, mentally ill people? How can I see the Creator in the form of a rapist, a murderer, one who might do harm to myself or my family? Am I wrong to fear those who do harm to others? How do I see the perfection in all of these people? Because it’s indwelling in all men, regardless of what they present. You are in fear and judgment. It’s an opportunity, when you see someone that you would put outside the light, to see the light where they are. What you judge you fear, and what you call to yourself in your fear is the equation with them, the equality to them at that level of debasement. The murderer is still an aspect of the Creator. She does not know who she is; she is lost in her crisis of replication of fear. How you attend to this person is not to be in fear with them, but to honor the Divine that is intrinsically there that is hidden in shadow. That heals you both. If you wish to judge, you may, but you cannot be the light and hold another in darkness. That is the hypocrisy of most of your religions, “I am holy and they are not.” Those who have been led astray, who have followed a path in fear, are as deserving of love as those of you who are complacent in their worth. We thank you for the very good question.
Q: But our world is based on wolves in sheep’s clothing, and those of us who are compassionate tend to be more gullible and naïve to begin with, so how do we rule out betrayal and hurt? These are all decisions that you make, and you are dealing with the teaching on a superficial level. The Divine is in everything. That does not mean that you don’t use discernment. If somebody has an axe and they are waving it at you—time to leave. Do you understand this? It does not mean you subjugate yourself to anybody else; in fact, it means that you never do that because you know who you are. But the convenience of a teaching that says, “I only get to be Divine and see the divinity in nice people who may never harm me,” is
foolish. You are staying in a commune that is encircled by a fence that would keep out the rest of the world. If, in fact, you know who you are, you know who others are as well. You do not lose your discernment. To know somebody as a Divine Being does not mean you have to have dinner with them, or give them all your money, or do something that would be foolhardy. You must understand that you are witnessing them in their true state, beyond the mask that they have worn in this incarnation. The Divine as you knows this is so, and she is who you learn through. The personality self believes she needs protection because she has been taught that, but if you believe that this is a world of wolves in sheep’s clothing, you will never leave the house. It does not mean that you act in foolishness. He lives in the city.* It is wise to lock the door. That is prudent, but it is not an act of fear. An act of fear would be never opening the door to see who might be out there. That would keep him from the life he so sorely needs to live. We thank you for the very good question.
Q: There have been quite a few times where I find myself in situations where I’m broadcasting a low frequency only to realize it after the fact. Is there any way I can decrease the number of times I find myself in a lower frequency so I can try to sustain a higher frequency continuously? You’re learning through this. You’re understanding what you do, and as you make choices that are not predicated on fear, you will find it much easier to keep your alignment. So many of you make choices in fear and then affirm them: “Well, that’s the right thing to do—I have to get my way—that’s the only way to be,” and then you are surprised when you drop your vibration. This is not a judgment of you. You’re all learning through this process. It’s a productive process. When you claim, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” you are deciding for the self that you are present and you may choose outside of the historical data that you’ve been replicating unconsciously.
Day Nine
We ask you questions today about your lives and requirements for growth as you perceive them. You perceive yourself in need, “I need a new house,” “I need a lover,” “I need a place to be where I am welcome,” but you don’t interrogate the needs in light of what we have taught you thus far. As you are growing, in most cases you determine a path as you think you should, and underline the word think. There is nothing wrong with thinking, but it is not what you are knowing, and in your knowing, and as you act upon your knowing, you claim identity in action. Now this must be understood. You perceive yourself as you are, “I am the man in the chair, speaking to the Guides,” “I am the woman on the telephone, hearing the transcript in motion.” You are in identification through the self as you are in your being. But in this very moment you are doing much more. You are perceiving, and the perception that you hold, those things you see and understand in this way are being brought to you and being claimed by you through the personality self. Now we’ve begun to lift your vision and you understand yourself as the one choosing in identity, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.” What you are bringing to you is certainly in accord with the claim, but you are not perceiving it as such. You see your dilemmas, “Oh, I created another disaster, oh, woe is me.” You see your identity as it is reflected back by others, “She doesn’t want to have a date with me,” “He is not the man I want to know,” and you are still creating from the smaller self in spite of the claims you have been making. The perception of the Christ as you must be understood now, and must be understood so you don’t fool yourselves into a blasphemy, and we use the word “blasphemy” intentionally. “I see the one before me with the eyes of the Christ when I like what I see” is a false teaching. “I see the one before me with the eyes of the Christ when I am feeling good about myself” is a false teaching. The manifestation of God as you that is able to perceive does not decide what is worthy. She knows all, all—underline that word all—are worthy of being seen in their Divine worth. The subjugation of the aspect of the self that would like to judge is not the solution here. “I know I don’t like that woman, I know I dislike that man, but I will see the Divine in them anyway” is not the way this works. You are not doing that. When you are lifting your vision, you cannot have a cellar full of dirt that you are assuming is not there. We have taught you about judgment in prior teaching and as we have often said, “What you judge, you fear,” but the claim you are making now, “I see with
the eyes of the Christ,” is a being. It is a being, a way of being in process, in action as the Word, and the manifestation of God in man you can call the Word if you wish to. We have often said and will continue to say that the Word—and underline that—is the energy of the Creator in action, and that is you when your fullness has been claimed. How you know yourself as this is not an intellectual ideal, and those of you who get confused—“I can never be this”—are deciding in advance to limit the aspect of the Creator that may be known as you. There is a process, yes, of acclimation, but the being of this is the presentation of the Divine as you and in all. If it is not “all,” it is a fabrication. “I am a Divine Being. I witness the God in all things, except that guy over there who I know is a bad person.” Now Paul is confused by this. “But what do I do about the one I think is bad, the one I hold in fear, the one that I wish to guard myself from?” Well, you understand that when you honor somebody in their worth, you align to them as having the right to be. We will say that that is the requirement to move the energy to a higher level. “I don’t like him very much, but he has the right to be as he is, and in my acknowledgment of him as he is I lift him to the vision that I may know through, ‘I see you with the eyes of the Christ.’” You must understand that all that has been created has a right to be. And the creations of man, the things you use to disturb your frequency to harm yourselves and your brothers, have a right to be as well. But you can change your way of identifying with them and lift them as well. “I see the one before me with the eyes of the Christ” is not a placebo. “I get to feel good now, I saw someone, I didn’t judge them so harshly, perhaps one day I will say hello to them again and I will go on my way” is not the teaching we are giving you. The manifestation of God in man, as may be witnessed by you, is the lifting of the one before you to the sight you may hold. It is an action; it is not a passive acknowledgment. Now the Divine as you who may witness another knows the power of sight, the power of perception. When you see the child before you who has been told he is bad, who holds herself in shame, and you see her with the eyes of the Christ, you are lifting her, you are bringing her up to her own potential in realization. Paul is seeing someone lifting from the floor as if being levitated by the eyes before him, and it is a very apt metaphor for what is happening on a level of vibration. The eyes of the Christ are lifting the vibration of all that they see, and that includes what you would have damned prior to understanding this teaching.
You do not damn war. You do not damn murder. That calls it to hell, and the agreement to hell is the agreement to the lack of God. Do you understand this? If God is in all things, all things may be lifted to that vision of the Divine and are transformed by and through the lifting. When you see with the eyes of the Christ, you are attending to the world before you in its Divine potential. You are not deciding that something is good that you think is bad. You are not pretending to like murder or honor war. You do none of those things. What you are doing is lifting them to the vision of the Creator and in the lifting the swords will be dropped, the sick will be healed, and the world you will know will be transformed. If you can imagine a million people witnessing one man in his infirmity and seeing the healing that is always present, the vibration of the healing will lift the man. If you see twenty people deciding that they are in their worth because you see them as such and you are lifting them as a group, they will also be able to lift the world that they perceive. Paul is asking, “Is this by osmosis?” He doesn’t even know what the word means, but he is using it, and we will say, yes, perhaps you can call it that. The lifting is done not by the hands and by effort but by perception in witness of what is already there. When you witness the Divine that is present, the awareness of the Divine is manifested for you in vibration, and as you are in consort with the vibration of the Christ as the perceiver, what you see meets you at that level. Well, you don’t want to do it. “I am much too busy. I don’t want to walk to the store and see the Divine in all things. I want to get the food for my supper.” You can do that if you like, but the awareness, we say, of the Divine in all, regardless of what you think, is the key to the Kingdom that you say you wish to inhabit. As you know yourselves, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” you are vibrating at a level of manifestation that you have never been before. Your consciousness understands this and the personality self who is very attached to what she has known herself through will be in rebellion, or dismissiveness, or “it’s too much work.” “As I know who I am, I see the world with new eyes. As I see the world with new eyes, I lift the world to its own recognition of the truth of what it is.” All mankind, we say, one day will know who they are. It is the progress, or the evolution of the species, the consciousness of the species to reunify in its
knowing. Now reunification is not someday far away—in a million years mankind will know their divinity. Mankind knows it now. On a higher level it is already present. What we are doing with you now is clearing the clouds that have precluded your ability to know that this is so. The hierarchy that we engage in is simply a way of understanding you. We witness you from a place of evolution in spirit and consciousness where we may hold for you the vision of who you are. And in our lifting of you, you lift others and your world. This is not doctrine, and by “hierarchy” we mean, very simply, that while we are all one, we are in a position to see and, consequently, to instruct and absorb the requirements for each of you as you move upward in your own way. As you know yourselves as you are and are in your union with your awareness of your Divine Selves, as you witness the world before you in the Christ, or the manifestation of God as may be known in the physical realm, you align to us as teachers. We have always said that we are not teaching students, we teach the teachers. This does not mean you require a classroom. It does mean, though, that you align to yourself in a vibratory way that may support the ones that you meet or, perhaps, never meet and the instruction can happen not only through example, but through your field. As your vibratory field is aligned at this level, others you may know or never know who are in engagement with this field—in person, yes, but also in the unified field that you all share here—are aligned to their own realization of what can be made and known by and as them in this lifting in form. As you grow, your world grows with you. Paul has a question; we will attempt to answer it. He is simply asking, “If some of us align to this level and others refuse or resist, do they go into two camps, are there two realities that coexist?” In fact, there is only one reality. All the aspects that you perceive are illusory, but because you engage them and call them into manifestation in environment, in social class, in all things of the physical realm, you begin to understand that two men may stand side by side in a garden and one will be in Eden and one will be in hell based on what they know and what they claim and what they see. Now we are using the world “hell” only as an illustration of a decision in consciousness, not as a real place you go to. As we say to you, there is not a polarity or a distinction; there are simply different ways of being in experience. You loved the movie; the one beside you couldn’t stand it. It was the best meal you ever ate; the one beside you choked on her food. You may have different
experiences of your vibration because what you call into being is always a reflection of your consciousness. Now as you lift the one beside you, that does not mean that she should agree with you about anything. The lifting that is happening is an agreement, in fact, in consciousness and vibration. But do not expect others to embrace this teaching because it has served you; their path may be very different and perfectly appropriate to whatever their needs are. As you align to the Christed Self, as the one who sees, you no longer decide what is good for the next person. You have no right unless it’s your child, or you have been called to caretake for someone who cannot choose for themselves what is the high way for the next one, or the one after that. Each man is given jurisdiction of her choices and her right to choose. There are many roads up the mountain and, as there should be, there are different ways of moving up and beyond what you have known as a physical reality. The Christ as you becomes your teacher and lights the road, the path that you will take, but each man may know herself, himself, on the trek through her own aspect of this aspect of the Divine that is your teacher. Now as we teach you today, we have to encourage you to claim your independence from what you were taught to see and how you were taught to see it. “What a beautiful woman, look at those cheekbones and that complexion.” “Look at that ugly man, poor man, he must be in despair.” These are agreements that have no real substance. The beautiful woman may one day be less than beautiful by your perception and the ugly man may be joyous but you may never see. You have decided for him based on the concepts that you are all taught to engage with. Today we would like you to go for a walk and claim these words: “Each one I see is an aspect of God, and each one I witness I realize as sovereign. Each one I see has a right to be here just as she is, and it is my gift to be seen and to see with the eyes of the Christ.” And then you will claim this: “I see the ones before me with the eyes of the Christ.”
As you pass each man or woman, you will be engaging with them in frequency. You may begin to feel it in your own identity through the field you hold. And each time you bless another in this way, “I see the ones before me with the eyes of the Christ,” you are lifted in turn. As you walk the streets, as you go to your workplace, align to the experience that this gifts you with. “I have the right to see in a new way. I have the right to perceive in a new way. I have the right to choose what I claim in my perception.” The identity you hold is being reencountered through her own ability to bear witness to God in this physical realm. Begin with the people you see before you. As we continue with this teaching, we will challenge you to perceive those things that you would judge as dark or as fearful with the eyes of the Christ so that you may begin to learn how to lift your world. When deciding is done with the Divine Self, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” you all will be called into service, and the eyes of the Christ will be what illumines you and your pathway. The vision of the Christ, you see, is the incarnation of the Christ through you in your perception. You are agreeing to this by this teaching. “I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here. I see all things with the eyes of the Christ.” Now we will teach you again tomorrow but we will leave you with these words: It is not impossible to achieve this level of awareness. It is not impossible to know the self at this level of incarnation. And it is very possible to align to it by gifting yourself, all aspects of you, to be in the light in service to the Creator. You are here. You are here. You are here. We thank you for your presence and good night. Stop now, please.
Day Ten We teach you as we can and, as you allow us to be your instructors, we come forth with the lessons that each of you need individually to assume responsibility
for your own lives. Now we don’t speak to your lives in the way you think, “I am going to get a new car,” “I’m going to marry the man I want,” “I will have all my needs met in the way that I think that I should.” You will get something different from us—the consciousness that you require to know what you need outside of what you were taught. And as we teach you, we actually bring you forward to meet your selves, your True Selves, in marriage, in an awareness of the Divine union that is always present but has not been aligned to. Now what a creation is is a thing brought into manifestation through thought, conscious thought or unconscious thought, individually or collectively, something that has been made into form. What has been made into form has a requirement, there was a need for it, it was made to do something. You build the house to give you shelter. You create the marriage to give you a companion. You create the job to have the sense of identity and value, to support yourself in agreement with the systems that you’ve collectively decided must be there. And that is the word to underline this time, must. When you think something must be there, it is brought into form. And when you believe it must be there, whether it’s a high creation or a very low creation, you are aligned to it, in acceptance of it, and in that choice, “I see this thing before me, it must be so,” you give it merit and you add to its structure. If you can understand that: When you think of something in a certain way you bring to bear the vibration of that thought on the thing you see. You like the bank you went to. They were very kind to you at the teller’s booth. You pass the bank and you say, “Oh, I have a good bank.” Your perceptions, you see, are informing the vibration not only of your relationship to your own thought but upon the thing itself. Now what we are teaching you today as we continue is that what you create you must attend to at a new level of consciousness. When you believe something must be there, you give it credence, and there are things you give credence to that do not need to be there. Here is a list of things that do not need to be there: Fear, in all its forms and in all its creations. And here is what is fear: war, poverty, greed, anger, abuse, and violence. These are all things you see out-pictured that you think must be there. “Well, they must be there, they’ve always been there, how will they leave? I don’t buy this for a moment.” Here is how they leave: The light that you are in its full expression has the ability to move a mountain. The alignment you have individually is much more powerful than you can conceive of, but if you can imagine the collective
thought, the collective agreement that is made manifest through this new alignment, “I see all before me with the eyes of the Christ,” the manifestations that you believe, underline believe, must be there will not be there in the new vibration. If you wish to know what it means to be a master, it means to change matter through your own conscious manifestation and expression and it is done, every day, by each one of you and you don’t even know it. “Today I went to the grocery store. I got what I required. I knew I would get what was there and I put it in my basket and I went home. I made what I needed to dine. I put the things in a pot and I cooked them and called it my own.” In conscious thought you engaged in a process where your needs would be met in the ways you thought they should be. Now you understand that that was all done in physical form; you chose the pot and the food you put in it. But what you don’t know is that, on a higher level, you were actually calling into manifestation the requirements for your journey to the store, and your expression of the diner eating her own food is reaping the benefit of your simple manifestation. Now Paul is questioning this teaching: “How does making a stew make someone a master?” Here is how: Your conscious thought calls into being the things you require to express through. A meal is a very simple choice, but you do not understand that your expression, what can be called into being, supersedes literally everything you thought you could do. What the master knows is who she is—the aspect of the Creator that she is expressed as, not at a level of personality, but a sense of union and recognition of the union of all, is what brings her light to bear on all things she sees before her. When you are the lamp that lights the world, you illumine and transform. Here is the teaching: “As I understand myself as the master that I am, I claim my divinity in my expression as and through me. And as I bear witness to what is made in form, I align these things through my divinity and expression of God to their true nature.” Paul is asking, “What is true nature?” Union with the Divine, because all things are of God and nothing is excluded. So the knowing of this impresses upon the thing you see, the witness you carry that aligns it to its own nature. You understand this, yes?
Now what you are not doing is changing things to make you happy. Fixing your hair may make you happy. Saying hello to your neighbor may be a fine thing to do, but telling your neighbor, “I am going to fix your bad back by my awareness of your union,” would be your ego deciding what should be. As you align to something in its true form, in its wholeness, it is done through the action of the Divine and not by your intention to make something the way you think it should be. We wish to clarify something to Paul, who has a bad back that he continues to claim as such. As you witness another in their wholeness and in union with their Divine Self, the Divine Self in them calls into being what their requirements are for the manifestation of their healing. You cannot presuppose why someone creates something. There may be an enormous lesson for them in an infirmity and they may not claim it any other way. So there are choices being made in high ways, and other ways as well, but it is not your purview to decide for somebody else what they will be. What you are telling them, at a level of vibration, is what they are already. “I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve. You are here, you are here, you are here” calls them into manifestation and their alignment, which is under the purview of their own soul. Their own True Self will call them into being as they align to the vibration. You understand now that you are in service to a Great Light. The Christ vibration, which is what we are assuming you as through our own intention, is only the awareness of who you have always been and now can be expressed through. “I am here, I am here, I am here” is the claim of this. You make it for your Divine Selves as the Divine Self speaks these words through you and you say, “Yes. Yes, I am here. I am, I am, I am.” Now as you teach yourselves to manifest at this level, “I have the right to change,” you must assume that what you are claiming into being is part of your progress. When it doesn’t seem that way, it is still part of your journey. “Well,” you may dismay, “look at what I’ve created, I must not be a very good creator.” “I have made a mess of things” is simply a way to know yourself through a creation. If you absolve yourself of the fear of what you’ve done, “I must not be very far progressed, look at the mess I made,” you will understand that, in some cases, the thing you call the mess is the greatest opportunity you will ever have to know yourself through your divinity. The I Am Self, the Divine Self, who knows all, has access to all, and will claim you, for you, as you agree to it.
Very few men come to the altar because they are so happy. Very few men decide to serve when they could be counting their money and being quite content with the things of this world. But all men, eventually, are called to the altar and asked to lay down the very things they have treasured the most, “my beauty,” “my health,” “my sense of worth based on achievement.” These are things that are carried to the altar by you and left there to be used. And understand this: There is nothing you have done, or known, or experienced that is not for good. And by “good” we mean, by the expression of your own experience you are informed of your own divinity through choice to be expressed. When the man who has been poor has a farthing in his pocket, he will gift it to the man who doesn’t, because he knows the expression. The one who has been fearful all her life knows herself now in a new way, but can align to the one in fear in great love and support her in her own new awareness of what can be freedom. The child who has been abused may become corrupt or may become the one who supports others in their own freedom from violence. As you understand that, the choices you make here to know yourself in your Divine worth, all of those past expressions, are brought to the altar with you. Your shame, your greed, your abused self, your need to hurt others, to be expressed as famous or as nothing worthwhile, all these things, these claims of being, are carried to the altar by you and are placed there to be in service to the Divine. And we promise you this, and we promise you this with our hearts: When you do this, you will no longer regret your history. When you offer it all to the Divine Self, the Creator within you and the Creator all over, when you give penance in the way you say, “I leave it to you to take, take my life, take my work, take my hands, take my heart, and use my eyes, use my being, to call forth the Kingdom,” you will be anointed and you will know freedom in a way you never have. When the man who counts his pennies to give himself security or the woman who watches her face in the mirror and counts on her beauty to have her needs met for her are aligned to the new possibility, they do not lose their beauty or lose their money—they’re all called forth. Each one of you, you see, has been manifested here for a very good reason. Your soul knows your truth. That aspect of you that came here to say, “I’m here, let’s know ourselves again through this expression, through this name I have been given in this incarnation, and through this game I play of realization through my expressions here to know, once again, who I truly am.” Underline truly, please.
The man that you are now, the woman that you are always, is always Divine. She doesn’t need to “get it” or to earn it, or to play the game of spirituality and dance around her candles saying mantras. That does not make you Divine. You cannot not be of God. The union we speak to you of is the awareness of this in manifestation, in the environment that you hold for yourselves. The creation of life that you witness is also Divine and cannot be other. The freedom we are offering you now is the gift of knowing that whatever you have known yourself through will be used in a new way, and the gifts you have been given by your Creator, whether or not you know them, will be called forth to be expressed through you. There is a way you know yourselves now—you attended this school, you were married to that man or woman, you’ve had several children or several careers—these are ways you have known yourself, but they have never been who you are. And as all things are placed upon the altar, the awareness of the Christ as you will envelop you and carry you forward. You call to you those things that you need. You will be led, we assure you of this, not only by us, those who teach you and your own Divine Self, but by the manifestations that you are now able to call into being. We wish to liberate you today in one way. We want to do a clearing with you and a clearing, in fact, is an offering. You are not disabling yourselves by saying these words; in fact, you are doing the opposite. And here is what we would like you to attend to as we teach you these words: “I give myself now to the altar. I offer myself now to the altar and I bring with me all of my expressions, my gifts and my fears, my life and my awareness, my knowing of myself and my fellows. As I give these things at the altar of the Divine Truth, the Christ made whole in mankind, I say these words: I choose of my own free will. I gift the world with my presence as I am aligned to the Divine that is the manifestation of God in mankind. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here. I am here. I am here.” We rejoice with you now, and we say these words on your behalf: We know who you are, and as we teach you, we bring to you the needed things to replace the things that may need to leave as you lift your vibration beyond the self you’ve known. As you are lifting now, we see you liberated. The past falls away and the
creations of the past that you have known yourself as now leave you lovingly and with ease. “I am free of what I have known myself as. And as I am liberated now, I am gifted with the Source of my being as my knowing, as my sight, as my expression, as my life.� We know who you are. We always have. And even in the darkness the light that you are is present. We shepherd you now up the mountainside. Follow us, please. This will be the end of this section. We will resume tomorrow. Thank you for your presence. Stop now, please. Period, period, period.
PART TWO
THE MOUNTAIN BEFORE YOU
CHAPTER FIVE
THE WELCOMING OF THE NEW Day Eleven
B
lessings to each of you who meet us here on this pathway at the mountainside. The climb is before us now, and as you have left your baggage on the altar behind you, you are ready now to climb the mountain with us. The way is very interesting. When you imagine a mountain, you imagine a slope, but, in fact, you aren’t really rising, you are putting one foot in front of the other and through that passage you are lifting. If you put away the axe that you would put in the mountainside and the ropes that you would use to hoist yourself up, you will see very shortly that you are simply rising through the process of engaging with yourselves and the lives you live. The mountain before you is your own life and the vibration you hold. And for a moment imagine, if you would, that the life that you live as it is right now is the out-picturing of your beliefs, the collective agreements you have made, and the consciousness that you hold that projects these things and supports them in manifestation. The alignment that you have been gifted with through this teaching thus far has lifted you already, so you will be witnessing things on this path that may have been there but you may never have encountered prior to this day, to this agreement to lift up the mountain of consciousness as your lives are witnessed by you. On the first day of this journey straight up the mountain we have to offer you some advice: Don’t run up the mountainside. Don’t run and get out of breath. If you can imagine running up a mountain and the altitude is too high, you will get dizzy, you will lose your moorings. As we said, we are taking you, one step at a time, up a mountainside that you are already existing at the base of, have
witnessed in your mind, but not understood was simply the creation of a vibration that ascends to a higher plane of “I Am” awareness. “I Am,” yes, you can put that in quotes if you like, if it helps the reader understand what we are teaching. Now what a creation is, and you know this already, is something out-pictured. So when you are walking up the mountain, you must learn to discern all of the creations that you pass by on our journey together. We will be instructing you in the teaching and offering you the support of what you may attend to as you pass them. Imagine this for a moment: You are walking up the mountain and there is a tiger in the bush. You never liked tigers very much; you believe they will harm you. You miss the beauty of the beast and her right to be there, protecting her cubs. Your engagement with what you see must be challenged for you to take the next step and move beyond the lion to what lies beyond her. As you encounter these things, as you trespass on your own fears, you will be encountering yourself through those creations that are simply there to shepherd you forward. Do not say, “Oh my dear, there’s a lion—time to go back to the base of the mountain where lions don’t exist!” Simply understand that you have called the lion into being to be in encounter with the fear so you may understand it, bless it, if you like, integrate the change that comes when you encounter the fear, and then go on your merry way upward. There are five stages to this journey and we are taking you through them each. The prior portion of this text has been “Introduction to the Mountain.” We will call this section, beginning with the last teaching, “The Mountain Before You.” This is the issuance of the teaching: The creations of mankind that you will bear witness to, one at a time, will be encountered and you will encounter them not only for your own good, but for all mankind. Understand, each of you, that when you attend to a fear, and that includes the fear of passing—we will get there eventually—you must understand that you are doing this not only for your own well-being, but for all who you will ever meet. As you are no longer vibrating at the level of consciousness that agrees to a certain fear, you give permission to everybody else to support themselves in their own knowing that this may be so. And we say, “Yes, we are working with you”; we are also here to support you in saying “yes” to the process of the encounter itself. “Okay, my friend, here lies the lion, the tiger, the fear, the thing you wish to avoid—how do we attend to it in consciousness?” As we support you in this, you learn very quickly that each thing you encounter on the mountainside is an
aspect of you that seeks reclamation. If you say that it is your fear, it is your creation and, consequently, can be attended to by you. The mountainside is full of things, not all of them fearful. There are great pleasures on the mountainside as well. Your lust may be here as well, your enjoyment of the physical senses, your desire to please. And as you see these things out-pictured before you and as you reclaim yourself as the master, your jurisdiction will go far beyond the small self that you have known yourself to be historically. We are on an adventure, yes, and, as Paul is asking, “Is this going to be a joyful adventure? It doesn’t sound like a lot of fun to me,” we will say this: This is the biggest adventure of your life, because it is your life, and as you understand your creations as vehicles of change, vehicles of progression, you are no longer frightened of yourselves. Understand this, friends: Every fear you hold, finally, is a fear of the self. There can be nothing within you that does not correspond to something outside of yourself, so the projected fears that you hold are actually tethered to you by your own need to be afraid. As we cut these little cords, as we align you beyond them, you integrate the self. Those aspects of you that required fear to stay safe, that believed you needed them to be alive fully, will be assessed by you and be decided upon by you. Understand this now: We do not take things from you. Don’t give it to us. We left things at the altar with you. We watched you do it. The altar is present wherever you stand. And what is too great for you may be placed there in an awareness of your right to claim the Divine in all you see before you. “What do I do with this fear? I don’t like the tiger. What do I do with this pain? I don’t believe in pain and I am in it. What do I do with this fury? I can’t contain it anymore. What do I do with this life that I no longer wish to live?” You offer it to the altar to be bathed in light, to be christened in a new way so you may progress, again and again, up the mountainside. We did say five stages—and we are saying this to Paul, who has been whispering that in the background—we will attend to the stages as we commence. This teaching unfolds as it’s needed, and if we were to tell you what happens next, before it is time, it will actually inform the channel and we do not wish that. This is a very pure teaching—the purest thus far. And when we say “pure,” we mean that the intention behind it is actually being supported by us and all of you, all of you who have asked from your heart’s desire to know the self in one with
God, in one with All, in one with your own knowing of the Creator. Those appeals have been heard and this is the response, this is the gift, this is the teaching we are saying “yes” to. We know who you are and we offer this in humbleness, in truth, and in an awareness of your need. As you walk up the mountain with us, you may give us names. “Who is the one beside me who holds my hand? Who is the one that teaches me, who whispers in my ear? Who is the one I call as my companion on this journey forward?” Paul is getting very worried. He calls us the Guides because that is a convenient name, and it suffices very well for the purpose of this teaching. You may call us what you wish. We know our name, and “I Am That I Am” is who we are in manifestation at different frequencies of consciousness. If you wish to put a name tag on us for your own convenience, you can if you like, but the truest name to call us is Melchizedek, and we are using this name in vibration and in love. The manifestation of God in man that is here now has always been present in us and the holiness we know you through, the clouds we see you through are parting now for your participation on this path. The next stage of the path for each of you is the welcoming of the new, and this is the chapter heading for the section we are calling the “The Mountain”: “The Welcoming of the New.” Here we go: “On this day I decide to welcome all that will come to me in a new way. I will not decide in advance what my response should be. I will not decide in advance what it must be, based in my heritage. I will allow myself to be taught by the holiness of my being and with the eyes of the Christ that I align to. I will allow my perception to welcome things in a new way.” “Behold, I make all things new” has been the teaching, yes. You are not doing this through the personality. You are doing this with the alignment and the welcoming of the new. The Christ as you understands, has love for all mankind, and the refuge of the small self, when she is called forward, is to blame, is to challenge, is to run and hide. As you are witnessed by us on this fine morning when we speak through Paul, as we are witnessed by you as you engage with our words, you climb the mountain, and you call to us, “Look what I see! Look what I welcome! Look at what I witness in a higher way!” Everything you see before you today may be challenged by the welcoming of the new.
Now what a new experience is is simply a new understanding of your encounter with the reality you know yourselves through. When you welcome the new, you are actually including those manifestations that may begin to operate through you in the higher dimensions you are aligning to. The Christ consciousness, if you wish, as a level of knowing begins to inform your vision and the vista that it holds before her. What is called to you in the new way may surprise you, but you must each understand that the challenges that you claim are the ones you require to know yourselves through. The teaching you are receiving now, “Welcoming the New,” is an important one, because your ties to your history, the desire to look back on what you have known yourself as, your impressions of who you should be—the wealthy woman, the sad man, the debutante, the beggar, whatever names you have known yourselves as—will be called into question. As you walk the mountain, you do so naked, and we don’t mean without your clothing but without the names you have dressed yourselves as, that you have worn. “I am the mother,” “I am the child,” “I am the one who works so hard,” “who never gets it right,” “who will never climb the mountain to the top because I know I can’t.” Whatever those names are that you have used will beckon you and invite you back. As you rise, as you release, as you reclaim, as you move to wonder and the awareness of all that can be, the song that you begin to emit as your vibration is one of joy—and we say “joy” intentionally—and we are saying this for Paul, who does not believe he will know joy; he will always be a cranky man who worries far too much about things that may never happen. Paul, you, too, will know the joy we speak of and we are teaching you as we teach the rest. You have a right to this, you see, and it was your whisper we heard so many years ago when you said, “Take me all the way—may it be so?” And we came and said, “Yes, it may.” We have been holding your hand for many lifetimes. We will not leave you now. We teach you all, every one of you, in an admiration for the changes you are going through in this encounter. We are teaching you each at the level you can comprehend. Now this is very important for you to understand: The level that you can comprehend is what you can attend to and no more. You do not give trigonometry to a child who cannot add two and two. She will be baffled and ashamed. You will be addressed by this teaching and by our call at the level that is appropriate to you at whatever stage of evolution and growth you are now at. And we say this again: As we teach you where you are, we also understand that one day you may be very good at trigonometry, but that does not mean you
should get the lesson book now. You must be taught at the level of awareness you can attend to, but you will not be left behind. You must understand that the teaching of right and wrong that all children receive is taught through their entire lives in very different ways. We will discuss morality later and what right and wrong means, because so much of what right and wrong means is actually what you’ve decided it should mean. But the teaching of right and wrong as an example is a very good one. It is still the same lesson: “Don’t take your friend’s food off his plate without asking first” would be for the child, and for the adult something very different, so it is appropriate to understand that we are doing this at all levels. Now we will say this. Here we go: “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve,” which is actually a basis for the challenges you face, must be known by you again and again. And “known” does not mean parroted as litany, but “known” as expressed as you in the circumstance you find yourself in. When a circumstance arises that appeals to you to change and the small self, who knows herself through history, starts screaming, “Get off the damn mountainside! You will fall down! You will fall off the cliffs! Come back home where it is safe!” you must understand that this is a test of some kind. Now this is not a test you pass or fail. That would put you back into right and wrong. But we will say each time you encounter the fear, or move beyond the blame, or attend to the lower nature and lift it to the higher, you give yourself permission to progress. As you stand there facing the tiger in your own paralysis, the path still waits for you to rise up to. It will never be gone. It will be there when you are ready. In this lifetime or the next, it will be there. Here we go: The teaching you are receiving was manifested by us in writing and in tone. “In tone” means vibration and, as you know, the decrees we work with, the claims of truth we teach you with, are encoded with vibration so that you may be attended to in frequency. As we progress with you, the intonation will actually be transformed. If you can imagine that your ears that only hear certain tones will suddenly be opened to a higher tone that has always been playing, you will be listening in a higher way to what has always been present. There may be many octaves in one claim of truth, which is why you don’t say them once. When you claim, “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve, I am here, I am here, I am here,” on a Tuesday, the intonation you receive in your field will be very different, perhaps, than when you claim it on a Sunday and your field has already been transformed by your requirements and growth.
Now as we teach you we are playing music to accompany you on the path. This is not just music so you are happy, this is music that holds your field. Some of you will feel this when you are resting. You feel the vibration through the systems you hold. You are awakened at night by a buzzing through the senses and through the skin. And we say to you, this is us with you, and it is you with us and your own guides acclimating your vibration to the atmosphere of the mountainside. You must be prepared for this ascension up the mountain. Do you understand this? You must be prepared for the octaves that will play. The ears must be opened, if you wish to use the metaphor, to acclimate to the sound that is there. This is not a dangerous operation, you see, no more so than preparing for any journey, but we do understand that the experience some of you have of feeling us when you are working both delights and frightens. Those of you who like the experience and acclimation to higher knowing and vibration are thrilled to have a manifestation that you may know in physical form. Those of you who desire this only on an intellectual level are often challenged when you feel the vibration because you assume something must be happening that you are not in control of, and that is not a good thing in your mind. We are working in tandem with you at a higher level. Understand this, please: We are working with you and the consent that is required is imbedded in this teaching. Nothing happens here without your own agreement to participate in a higher level. Your soul is saying, “yes,” perhaps, and your small self is screaming, “Get me out of here.” Ask the small self to appeal to the soul, to the Divine Self, if you wish, to the Christed Self, if you prefer, and ask questions you need. But we underline these words: Nothing happens here without your consent. We are teachers; we are not your masters. We befriend and we support, but we do not follow you with a whip up the mountain or tell you where you have to go. We do not teach in that manner, nor do we support others who do. The teaching we gift you through Paul has been prepared for you in love, and underline love if you like. We are not frightened of you because we are not frightened of ourselves. We actually love ourselves because we understand, very simply, who we are in love. And to be in love is to be in response, alignment, and recognition of the love of the Creator, which exists as a field that you may be attuned to. On this mountainside there are places to journey to and ample places to rest. When you walk up the mountain, you will be met by several people, several entities in different forms. They may appear in spirit, but more likely they will
appear in flesh, and these will be the people to support you when you need to rest and reacclimate to where you are. It may be a friend you know, it may be a visitation in a dream, but each one of you, when you have the opportunity to rest, will be greeted with joy and with comfort, “Here I am, taking my time to ponder my life, to understand my needs, to understand my progression as I go forward on this next stage of this adventure.” The trials you face on the road are part of the adventure. You are not being punished. Underline that, please. You are not being punished by the creations you attend to. And when you say “welcome the new,” in fact, what you are doing is welcoming your perception to be lifted by the encounter with the thing that would challenge you. On your walk today, on your walk down the hall of your own home even, welcome the new. When you say “welcome,” you are in invitation, and an invitation is always met in Divine Love when you call it into manifestation by saying, “Yes, I am here.” Now we will stop very shortly. We are progressing well with this text. But the man in the chair needs support as well, so we are going to invite the reader, wherever you are, to claim these words for Paul. He will experience them in love at whatever time you are attending to them. “I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve. You are here, you are here, you are here.” This will support the vibration not only of this text as it is being written because, as we have said before, we work out of time and the text, in its own way, does not exist in linear time in a way that you may comprehend. So you will gift the text you are reading by the support of the man who also needs the reminder that he is a Divine Being and is deeply loved. When you say to your own child, “I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve, you are here, you are here, you are here,” you are blessing them in high ways. You may not need language, spoken language, to say this, the intent will do, and the work you do with the intent is to welcome the new that they are. Now we will stop in a moment, but we leave you with these words: The journey has begun. You have walked up the mountain. We say “yes, yes, yes” to all that we know together. In love, we thank you for the gift of your presence. Stop now, please.
CHAPTER SIX
UP THE MOUNTAIN Day Twelve
W
e teach you as you are, as you come to be. As you know yourselves in your true essence, you will begin to evolve to a higher level of comprehension, understanding of who and what you have always been. The trajectory you are choosing now will be with you through this lifetime. It does not stop at the end of the chapter, or at the end of the book. The trajectory you are choosing now will last many lifetimes hereon and forever. The life you are living now, in many ways, has been prepared by you for this journey up the mountain. And the first stop on the mountain is a rest stop. You must sit for a moment and remember everything you have been since your life began. It’s a simple exercise, really, in claiming your history so that you may understand that it is not who you are. Sit where you are for a moment and do this with us: Imagine that everything that ever happened to you, good, bad, whatever you would claim it as, was brought to you for a reason, whether or not you know it. And the idealization of things in your life, achievements, perhaps, or those things that you believed harmed you, will be put in proper perspective as long as you understand that there is nothing that could have happened to you to make you unworthy of the journey that you are now on. The reflection we are asking you to do is a very brief one. It’s about naming the self as independent from your creations. If you see the things before you in the room you sit in and you know that they are all not you, if you see the hands you hold before you and know that all that they have claimed in this manifestation were required for her progress, you can claim what follows.
We are teaching you now about leaving the life you’ve had in an earnest way. Not escaping it or denying it, but parting ways with the dependence on identity based in what you’ve known. You do not have to leave your family, leave your job, do anything other than know, in this very moment, that what you are doing is reclaiming your Divine Self and giving permission to understand, to comprehend your True Self in disengagement with what she has thought she was. From this resting place you will be attended to by us as you sit where you are. We put new shoes on your feet, and we do this intentionally. New shoes are a symbol for us of the walk forward in reclamation of freedom, in truth, and in response to the requirements of your own soul’s growth. The new shoes we place on your feet are bright ones, they shine and glow with the awareness of the joy of union and they will always lead you there. We put the shoes on your feet and we tie the laces. We say “yes” to the man you are, to the woman you are, the being you are that has come to walk forward up the mountainside and we say these words for you: You are here, you are here, you are here. The ignition of the Christed Self as and through you becomes the beacon that will guide your way. The illumination of the heart you hold, of the perception you keep, of the knowing you have will grant you the purview to see through the mist to the truth of all. “To the truth of all” means you see in truth and you do not lie to the self about your perceptions anymore. The vanquishing of the fearbased heart, the releasing of the fear-based self, is part of this journey, yes, but you cannot go very far up the mountainside unless you know yourself in truth. Now when we say “truth” for you, we don’t only mean your essence, we mean the truths you know and the prohibition to you, at this juncture, is you can no longer lie to the self about who and what you are. Paul is confused by this: “Am I hearing correctly?” You are hearing fine. We will explain for you. When you go on this journey, you will be tempted, many times, to see the self as you have been, within the old clothing, the old masks, the old ways of perceiving. And the truth of who you are must always be attended to, as you know these things to be false. The false self, you see, does not know she is false. She believes her survival depends completely on what she has been. She does not die. She is acclimated to the wonder of who you are, and she is on the journey with you, but she cannot be trusted to tell you truth about what you see. When you see with the eyes of the Christ, you see beyond appearance. The personality self regards herself as
infallible in her dominion, she perceives what she requires to see to prove herself right. “How do you know the difference?” Paul is asking. By a very simple exercise: “Am I afraid?” Anything that you perceive that instigates fear, that tells you you should be afraid, in many ways is inviting you to claim fear as an accessory, as a discipline, as a way of knowing the self. When you move beyond that, you realign the vibration to hope, and to knowing of who and what you are. We say “hope” intentionally because it is a stepping-stone for some of you to faith, and knowing is faith in its purest sense. “Now what do you do,” he is asking, “when somebody comes at you with a knife? You are supposed to be afraid, that’s how you know how to run away.” The Christ as you does not run away. She may depart a situation in a claim of truth, but in her true essence she is never afraid because she does not align to fear. It does not exist as her. When you know yourself in this fashion, everything changes. The world is new because there is no fear to taint it. When we teach you to be in truth, we say these words again: There is never a lie told, never has been, that was not told in fear. When you lie, you are afraid of something and you are defending something. When you are lying to the self, you are trying to keep the self from truth. The action of truth will always be to lead you forward. It will always be such. And as we say these words to you where you sit, we lift you to the truth of who you are. “On this day I choose to witness the one before me as she knows herself, as he knows himself, in the vibration of truth. We claim you before us in your perfected state, and as we know you in truth, in alignment with truth, we claim you as the one who knows who she is, what he is, how he serves.” We claim this for you in our own vibration as a testament to the God within all. We thank you each for your participation in this agreement. Now here we go! The mountain is here! We are at the base of the mountain together and you are not alone here. There are many with you. If you understand this, that this is a group achievement, you will understand that the vibration that you each hold that is commencing to assume this wondrous journey, you will claim freedom and faith in the awareness that you are not alone. In consort with your fellows, you rise above the known to the first stage of comprehension:
All is real and all is true. All can be claimed in a higher way. As all is claimed in a higher way, the illusions that you have known as the material world you live in are re-created in high vibration. “All is real” signifies the Creator in all, the vibration of God in manifestation in all. “All is true” signifies the vibration of the Creator as truth that may be known in all manifestation. “I know who I am”—the claim of truth that reidentifies you as who and what you are. “I know what I am”—I am this thing I say I am, I am the aspect of the Creator known to me in my life as expressed in worth, in love, in choice, and in freedom. “I know how I serve”—the clarion bell is rung as your service commences. And the commencement of your service is here, is here, is here. Here is the first stage of knowing on the mountainside: “All is real. All is true. All is of God. It cannot be other. As I claim these words, I sing the song of the Incarnated Self, and the echo of the voice that I sing through resounds across the mountainside: I have come to know the Father. I have come to know the Mother. I have come to know the One that has No Name. I have come to be in alignment with the Infinite as I grace myself, as I am graced, in the union I express through. I am here! I am here! I am here!” The song is sung by you and through you, and the claim is made in a witness that there is nothing that can be made that is not of the Creator. Here you go, Paul. He is interrupting with questions: “At the beginning of the text you said that nothing is real. What is the contradiction here?” There is no contradiction. All is real in God. Nothing is real as perceived by the small self who demands to know herself through her creations. That is that teaching. Do you have another question, Paul? “Yes, I do,” he is saying. “Who the hell is this telling me I am singing a song? Am I really going up a mountain? I get frightened at the transmission when I don’t comprehend the teaching.” The teaching is for all, and we explained ourselves and introduced ourselves in the prior expression from the teaching of the day prior. You stand before us, the man you are, emblematic of all mankind who refuses to trust that you can come here, who says “no” at the first inclination that
something we say may not be so. So we are going to grant you a promise, and in granting you the promise we grant it to all the readers of this text: You will not be misled, you will not be treated poorly, and, in fact, you will be loved and carried when you cannot walk yourselves. We will walk with you and there are many of us attending to you, enough for all who may know may know what they are, enough for all who may say what they are, and enough for each of you who says “I am afraid.” We sing your song for you when you cannot sing it for yourself and we only demand one thing: that you claim in choice. We cannot choose for you, we are not allowed. We cannot supersede your will. Your free will is a gift of the Creator. It must be granted to you in order for you to choose for yourselves. So when you cannot choose for yourself, we will sit silently beside you and we will hold your hand and love you as you sit there until you align yourself to whatever choice you make. When you journey up the mountain, you must confront the aspects of the self that have been hidden. There are things that lie in caves, there are wonderful creatures that may be met by you that you will have known from other lives, there are people that you may see today who you may have incarnated with who have a justified anger at you that you must attend to on this cliff or another, but you will not be forgotten. You are always remembered and you are always shepherded as you say, “Yes, I may.” Paul is asking, “But what is the first stage? Five stages . . .” You are claiming it now. The song you are singing is a resounding echo of the claim of truth that carries you forward. You have been instructed not to lie to the self or to others, and the alignment to truth that we have gifted you with will support you in knowing when you are out of alignment. The freedom that you seek as the one claiming has been reminded to you through the exchange with Paul, and the resistance you have, and you may encounter again and again, is actually something that you must listen to. Why do you resist? What do you get from it? What is the purpose and why do you fight yourselves? It is much easier to close the book and deny you read the text than to assume that you may have an impediment to your own travels in your own resistance. The climate you rise to as you go up the mountain does not realize itself in fear and does not condone or know a lie. It does not exist. If you can imagine going to a country where everybody spoke the truth, that would be where you come to.
Now to speak the truth does not mean you harm another. “I don’t like your dress” is your opinion. It may be the truth of your opinion, but it is not the truth of the dress. Your requirements to learn how to treat your fellows will be discussed at length in this text because, as we continue this teaching, you are going to be confronted again and again by your desires to harm yourselves or the ones you see before you because it’s what you have always known. The integrity of who you are as it comes forth through this text, through the agreements you make, call to you, in every instance, the ways you have supported yourself in denial of your worth. And the climate change that you attend to in the ascension up the mountain quite simply requires that you attend to your worth and realize—and underline that word realize—where you fall short of your own agreement to know who you are in your worth. Now Paul is asking, “But what if I don’t know I am a Divine Being? You say it is true whether or not I know it’s true, but how do I know? I feel like I pretend when I claim these words.” We will reinforce this for you now. Whatever you think you are is the illusion. “I know who I am” is a claim of truth. You are always a Divine Being even if you don’t know it. The aspect of you who does know, the “I Am Presence,” is who claims this as itself through you. “I know what I am” in this incarnation, in these exchanges that I know myself through as the Divine Being I am. “I know how I serve,” the expression of God as and through you, comes as it is, not as you configure it through the intellect or through the small self. God serves through you because it is one with who you are. Do you understand this, yes? So there is no lying here. These things are always true. And even for the atheist it is still true. You can all attend to whatever beliefs you hold. The Divine as you, the spark of the Creator, is ever present even in your denial of it. You cannot lie and claim these words; they are always, always true. Now when you attend to the self as the one climbing the mountain, you come with some suppositions: “I will know myself as I am supposed to know myself.” Earlier, we said you need to welcome the new and we released the self and put the new shoes on you so you may have the new experience of what you see and what may be claimed. We show you now what may be witnessed from a higher vantage point. Imagine for a moment that you are standing on a cliff that overlooks a valley. Everything you have ever seen may now be seen from a higher perspective. You see yourself fighting with your spouse, you see yourself yelling at the child, or praying for companionship, or worrying yourself to death about this and that.
You see yourself rejoicing at a wedding, crying at a funeral, you see yourself attending classes, preparing for your day at work. You see yourself as infirm and getting well. Everything you have known may now be witnessed from a higher vantage point, and here is what you will notice: Nothing is as significant as you first thought it was. When you rise in perspective and you witness your life as it has been, you are perceiving the self as the small self through her small actions. This is not to discount any of them. We do not discount who and what you are at that level of agreement, but we do say to you the vision you hold now of the life you have lived may be very different when you see it from the higher view. Now if you invite yourself, in this moment, to perceive all these things about yourself, your own history, if you like, with the eyes of the Christ, you will illumine them all. Here is the teaching: “Whatever I have done, whatever I have known myself as, all the things I have worried about and carried hard upon my shoulders, everything I have lifted in joy, everything I have laughed for and with will now be lifted to the sight of the Christ. I see my history. I see who I have known myself as with the eyes of the Christ. I lift the vision of the life I have lived and attended to with the eyes of the Christ to meet me where I stand on this mountainside. I am perceiving myself now with the love that I hold for all mankind. I do not judge my actions. I do not fault my behavior. I see all I have been with the eyes of the Divine.” The majesty you see before you now is simply the imprinting of the truth on all you have known. Your perceptions of what you have been have been in judgment or attributes, ways of claiming a self that were taught to you. “I see the life I have lived with the eyes of the Christ” will support you in respecting the self that you have been and knowing, in worth, what she has known and been able to claim at the levels of consciousness that she has attended to, that he has attended to, thus far. Paul is feeling a presence behind him as he stands on the mountainside seeing the creations before him, the things he has known himself as. He feels two hands upon his shoulders. And as he feels this—please understand—we are with you as well. We support you now in your awareness, we acknowledge the pain of your
lives, we are nodding our head in agreement with your fears—yes, they have been so, yes, they have been known by you—and we understand that the life that you have lived thus far has been a challenging one in many ways. But as we see the life you have lived with the eyes of the Christ in tandem with you, we bring light to all that has been you. Imagine now that the vista before you, the life that you have lived thus far, is shining brightly, is being illumined by the Creator to be remade, to be remembered in the highest way, to be claimed anew as one with its Source. “I see the life I have lived with the eyes of the Christ. I witness the life I have lived in my Divine knowing of my true heritage. I am an aspect of the Creator manifested in form. I am here, I am here, I am here.” And you lift the life that you have lived thus far to be in union with the Creator. “How can this be so?” Paul asks. “The life I have lived thus far has already happened. It wasn’t very bright.” You must understand, Paul, that the Creator exists outside of time and you are within time only as you perceive it. So the action of the Creator may be present now, and then, and in what will be. “Glory, glory, glory is the Lord God almighty who was and who is and who is to come.” We move outside of time and bring to bear the witness of the Divine on all we see in all time. The landscape before you is transformed, and the life that you know yourself as, through, and in is being re-anointed in this awareness. What has been is being lifted to the light. What will be is lifted to the light. And as you stand before us, we claim you in our love. Paul is asking, “I see it brightly, am I here with you still?” We are with you always. The Divine as you, in all of you, is always in consort with the manifestations it may know itself through, and not one of you is alone. Trust this, please. On the darkest night we are with you and we know who you are. Now the landscape is fading before Paul. It is disappearing into the ethers and what is left is simply the knowing that whatever has been has been re-created or
re-anointed in its awareness of the Divine. We take your hand now, we take all of your hands now, and we lead you up the path that lights its way. We are taking you up to the next level of awareness. We will stop now. We will resume tomorrow. We thank you for your presence. Stop now, please.
Day Thirteen Now we will speak to you about the occurrences of the past several days as we continue on our channeling. Each one of you who reads this text is going to encounter the self in challenging ways. We said this to you in the prior chapter and it will continue to be the case. But you are being led through this process of encounters by us, by your own True Self, and the significant thing you must understand is that you will triumph. You must understand, each one of you, that the triumph of the soul, the triumph of the Divine Self, will have its encounters on its way to victory. Now we are saying this to Paul, but Paul in many ways is serving in proxy, a substitute, in some ways, for you in his experience. And we will explain this for you: As we teach through him, we may use him as an example for what is required, but his journey, we say, is no different than your own. So the attention we pay to him here is for example more than anything else. Now we will say this to him personally: What you are encountering now is the first stage. We spoke about an alignment to truth, and we said you would all meet things on your way up the mountain. The first thing that you have met, Paul, is the accuser, the one who would blame, the one who would deny Christ, or the light, or whatever you wish to call it, in a public way, for example. And we say “for example” as in, “he makes the example” or, if you wish, “she makes the example in pronouncement.” The echo of the pronouncement must be attended to by those who hear it. So the individual self, the one incarnated here who knows who he is in a high way, is led forward through an echo. Now you can understand that an echo is not truly present. It is the memory of the sound. And any echo, you see, will dissipate in time. But the memory of the voice raised in anger, the echo, if you wish, is what one walks through on this side of the mountain.
Now recrimination to all of you is something you should expect or see in your lives. You all have different ways, you see, to encounter your lessons. But the first stage, as we have said, in the alignment to truth, is the one who would confront the self as a lie. Now as we teach you, we are actually supporting you each in a recognition of what truth is. And here is the definition we will use for you today: When we say “truth,” we mean something that is always true, an eternal truth. As we teach you about God in man, we remind you of an eternal truth. When we talk about your hair color in this lifetime, it may have been gray yesterday and today it may be yellow, depending on how you attended to it. It was true that it was gray yesterday; it is true that it is yellow today because you attended to it as such. But an eternal truth is always so. Now on the mountainside you meet many, and the life you live is your walk up the mountain. We will teach you this: Heresy, we say, is actually a crime against the self. There could be no God, or no power good enough and great enough, to deny man. Why would God, or what you would claim as God, be that thing? But we will say this: When heresy is made, it is made against the Divine Self, the aspect of you that is Divine. When you hide your light, when you shut it down, when you are pretending to be small, in many ways you are aligning to an agreement not to be the self you truly are. And as we withstand this with you, as we invite you forward, the invitation will be there, again and again and again, to deny the light you are in favor of the louder argument “There can be no God, there can be no Divine.” Now Paul is getting stuck on the definition of “heresy.” It’s a very religious word, and we call on the language of religion when it suits us, but we do not adhere to it in the ways you have been taught. In some cases we reinterpret language for you that has been pronounced in heretical ways, which simply means when language is used to deny the Creative Source of who you are, it will be attended to in a higher way—in liberation, if you wish—but to support you in your awareness of who and what you truly are. The definition we are giving you now: that to be in heresy is only against the self but never against a great Creator who could not care less if you said, “Go away,” because he cannot go away. The Divine is always present, regardless of what you see before you. But because you have been given free will, you can dim the light, you can shut the door, you can do as you wish. When someone acts in fear, they are acting out of an alignment with their own awareness of their Divine Truth. When someone accuses unjustly, or uses
another to bring themself to a place of fame in a negative way, what they are actually doing is deciding for themselves that they will not be in an alignment, and that is their choice. We will tell you this much: There is no man born here and hereafter who has not encountered these things as they progress through their lifetimes. Some may be a missionary, some may be a slave master, some may be a king, some may be a pauper. You have all played all the roles as you progress forward in this play that you call your reality; consequently, you don’t have to give it great credence. But when you are on an initiatic path, a path where you encounter stages of initiation, you are encountering, always, the names you have known yourselves through in relation to others. We will explain this for you. When you meet a challenge in your life, you are actually encountering the thing you need to learn to move beyond. When you meet a hero on the path, a soldier, perhaps, who does good deeds for the benefit of all, you are having an image of what may be known as you, one who gives you the purview, by expression, to see what may be known. When someone’s behavior is not what you would like it to be, they become an example for you, perhaps, of what you do not require, but, in fact, all they are doing is expressing at the level of consciousness that they can attend to. Now as we continue this teaching, we need to clarify for Paul something he heard in the last session. “Glory, glory, glory to the Lord God almighty, who was, and is, and is to come” is a claim we make today. The awareness of the Divine in anything is to give it glory. That’s the simple definition here. To give the awareness of it, to acknowledge it, is to give it the glory. When you understand that the Infinite Self, the Divine as you who knows herself here and now, will know herself in all dimensions, in all time, you may understand and comprehend the term “who was, and is, and is to come.” You are infinite, yes, but you have been veiled by a shadow that lies to you. And when a shadow lies, it always tries to tell you that the sun has disappeared and will never return. At this stage of development when we speak to you of truth, you may have an expectation to claim your truth in one way or another in spite of appearances, in spite of the behavior of others, in spite of what may be said or claimed against you. However, we will say this: When you know who you are, these things become very small. The master knows her worth in the face of challenge. The master knows who he is in the face of adversity, and the master knows that the Kingdom lies before her regardless of what presents.
This sounds too convenient for Paul. He says, “This sounds like all of these teachings I have heard that we get our reward in the beyond. Is that this teaching? I don’t want to spend a lifetime in challenge. I want to live a good life, enjoy the fruits of the life I live, and appease myself in my awareness that I am progressing on my path.” This is not that teaching, but what we are saying is that when you claim this path, you will be in encounter with those aspects of the self that you have been lied to, out of alignment with, out of alignment with truth. This is a key: When you are presented with false evidence, the challenge is to see the truth. When you see someone in your life, anyone, perhaps, who is behaving in a way that would be contrary to what you know to be good, you are actually seeing evidence of a lack of alignment. A lack of alignment, very simply, is a lack of the awareness of the self-worth, and true self-worth, we say, never recriminates, never bullies, never harms, it has no need. Once you know who you are in your worth you have no need to prove a damn thing. The one who shouts his name from the mountainside, “Look at me, look at me, look at me! I have scaled the mountain! How victorious I am!” is truly at the base of the mountain. He has stepped upon a molehill and claimed it as a victory. His back is to the mountain because he looks to the world before him to show him his worth, and that will be his benefit, that will be his gift. When you rely upon the things of this world, and that includes the opinions of others to tell you that you are worthy, you will be sorely disappointed when you wake up to the reality that lies beyond the physical realm. We do not eschew pleasures of the physical realm. A flower’s scent is a great pleasure, the touch of a lover is a great gift, and we do not denounce these things of the world. We will tell you that when you seek to seek the self through others’ approval and recognition, when you rely on matter, material things, to give you a sense of well-being, or confidence, even, what you are actually doing is aspiring to the law of the physical at the cost of your own Divine Self. Now understand this very carefully. We are not telling you not to enjoy what you have. We are teaching you that it is simply something there to enjoy, it does not give you any more merit than anything else. A yacht is some wood that floats upon the water. So is a dinghy and, in some circumstances, the dinghy would be the preferred mode of transportation. When you have a houseful of people on your yacht who are battling one another with swords and fists, the dinghy may be a wonderful refuge. So don’t count on the things of this world to give you your wealth; seek it first in the Kingdom of Heaven.
Now this is a very old teaching and it does not mean that you sacrifice your life on this plane in anticipation of a life after death, it simply means to recognize the Kingdom that is here, has always been here, and will welcome you. But you cannot enter the Kingdom when you are worshipping your job, or your followers that you expect to lead you to a place of recognition, or your wife, or your father, or anything else. You live lives, you see, and they are here for a reason. Never think for a moment that we teach you to abandon the things of this world because that has never been our teaching. But the attachment to the material realm as your safety, as the thing you need the most, simply anchors you more to this level of vibration. You all need food; it is something from the material realm that is required to serve you in the physical form you stand in. You need a home, a place to rest, you need to bathe, you need to care for the body you are in. These are all things you are accountable to, and they are of this realm, but when you mistake these things for the Kingdom, you mistake yourself and the small self, perhaps, for the Divine Being. We will give you an example of this: When you get your way, you are feeling a charge, “Look at what I gained! I must be a grand Divine Being today! I manifested these good things.” In fact, your awareness may have brought you these things, but the moment you begin to decide that these things mean more than they do, you go into idolatry, and idolatry, very simply, is worshipping the physical realm as God, and that can be a totem of any kind, even a teacher. There is no one in a body at this time who is worthy of your worship; they may be wonderful examples and may hold a high vibration, they may do wonderful things, but they are not to be worshipped as the Creator. They are to be acknowledged as aspects of the Creator, as all men are. Now as we teach you today, “Up the Mountain,” which is the title of the chapter we are on now, we will grace you with the respite. We want you to know what lies at the top because there are days for many of you when it does not seem worth the climb. The journey at the top is very different than what you can imagine. “At the top” was said intentionally, we don’t mean “to the top” because at the top there is still more to go. We need you to understand that the Infinite Self that you are is always in progression. As you reach the top of this mountain, as you welcome the fine air, as you witness the gifts that may be known at this level of collusion and collaboration with the Divine Self and the Infinite, you will also notice that there
is another mountain just down the way. And as we teach you through this trilogy of texts, there may be more than one mountain for you to know. The gift of the mountain you are climbing now is the Christed Self and her awareness in love. That is a great gift. The mastery of that level of awareness is deeply significant. As you know yourself in this alignment, you know your world through it. Paul is saying, “Don’t tease us, please. Don’t lead us to a top of a mountain where there is nothing there.” There is nothing there in the physical realm. You have lifted to the higher vibration in expression, so if you expect a box of chocolates at the very top of the mountain as your reward, you would be limiting yourself vastly from what can be and may be known by you as the new self that you incarnate as. “We incarnate as a new self?” he asks. In fact, you do. The small self, if you wish, in her alignment has not reached the top in the way she thought she would. She has encountered those aspects of the self, the fears she has known herself as and through, the false idols she has worshipped, the memories that were born in distortion. She has witnessed these things, acknowledged them, and ascended beyond their purview. When you ascend beyond the purview of something, that simply means you are no longer in alignment to it, it has no real effect unless you decide to crawl back down the mountain and exist at the level of vibration that was calling to you. Here we go: “On this day I choose to encounter myself as my Divine Self in the face of any challenges I may meet. On this day I choose to align to truth in all circumstance. I have no need to defend or to decide for another who I am, what I am, how I serve. My truth will carry me through the situations I find myself in on this new landscape up the mountain. As I know these words to be so, I claim my own victory: I am free, I am free, I am free of the dragon in the cave, of the thing I have feared, of the thing I have chosen to know myself through. As I realign my vibration to victory, I ascend the mountain again. My hands are open to receive and my eyes are open to welcome the new.” The ascension has begun, my friends, and this will be the end of this chapter. We are grateful for your presence and we will teach you again tomorrow. Stop now, please.
CHAPTER SEVEN
BEING IN TRUTH Day Fourteen*
N
ow we ask you questions, each and every one of you. When you come to these classes, do you expect to be seen and, if you do, how do you expect to be seen? “I am the good student,” “I am the skeptic,” “I am the one who will know.” You call to yourselves every engagement you have and that includes the ones you don’t like. You precipitate them by your own intention to be perceived. Now the truth of who you are does not require this. The Christ as you, or the Divine Self, if you wish, has no need to be perceived in any way whatsoever. It means nothing to her. So when you have an issue of how you are perceived and treated, we would say, in many ways, you are claiming that through the personality or egoic self. Now the transmission we give you, although it’s filtered through Paul, is not of his personality. We acquiesce to his needs and his questions as they come because we work in tandem with his field and because his questions, in many ways, are yours as well, but we are not a product of the ego self. In fact, in many ways, we work well beyond it, but acknowledge it as necessary because you’re all here in a body and need these things to support yourselves at one level or another. Yes, you do need them, but not the way you think. You rely on the ego right now to tell you who you are. “I am the one who’s important,” “who is hurt,” “who is justified in his anger.” There is never a time that any of those claims is made by the Divine Self. Never one. And when you have those claims, you are operating from the small self, because she is the one throwing the tantrum, demanding retribution, seeking fame, seeking truth
through how she is perceived by her fellow man, when that is not where truth lives. The truth of who you are always and always is through the Divine Self expressed as you. And the Christ as you, or the manifestation of the Divine as you, which we call the Christ, is here to be known in her truth. We are teaching truth tonight, yes, for the reason that that’s what you need. You must understand, each of you, that as you align to truth, you do not align to deception, the deception of the self or the deception from others. The truth of who you are, in many ways, becomes the light that shines upon the darkness, and the lies you would know, that you would tell the self, tell another, or that would be told of you will be illumined and perceived for what they are. As you go into an agreement with the I Am Presence, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve,” you are claiming freedom from the false self who deals in lies. “Well,” you may say, “but I’m a very nice person, I don’t deal in lies.” You all do, unfortunately, because what you are perceiving before you, your relationships with others, the skin that you are in, is so born in investment of who you think you should be that you demand to be perceived in certain ways. And as long as you demand to be perceived in any way, shape, or form, you are lying to yourself that you are in truth. In fact, what you are doing is parading the false self and desiring her to be shown as the self that you truly are. The Divine Self as you does not need to be seen in any way, shape, or form, and very simply, because she knows who she is and she is confident in her awareness of all things that reflect her. Now the Divine Self operates in truth, and only truth. If you wish to know if you’re operating in the Divine Truth you can ask yourself this simple question, “How am I being seen?” If you want to know if you’re pretty, if you are being esteemed, if you are being judged harshly, if you are invested in those outcomes, you are still the small self, pretending to be something else. Paul is asking, “Well, how the hell do we get there? That seems so impossible.” Understand, friends, it is impossible to the small self and that is a question born of personality and of ego. The Divine Self knows the answer, fully, fully, fully, and can claim it any day: “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here. I am here. I am here.”
If you can understand now that that claim is never made by the small self, you can align to the Divine Self and express it. The small self may say, “I showed up on time, I am at the party at the right time,” but the Divine Self makes the claim “I am here.” It is an attunement, in many ways, to the vibration we hold, and as we hold it and express it we align it to all of you. As you align to us in your field, you go into a tandem agreement to the claim we make for you—“You are here, you are here, you are here”—and the agreement manifests as the Christ as you in her own alignment, who doesn’t care the way you think she does how she is perceived. And we say this intentionally: She doesn’t “think” at all. “How am I going to figure this out?” may not be the Divine Self at all. It is the small self who does not yet know. The creations around you were chosen by you, yes, but so was every circumstance, at one level or another, because you are in agreement with them; because they are there, they are in tandem with you. We bring you up to the new claim so you may know in truth who and what you are. Now the vibration we hold is actually a high level that can serve you to support you in your own lifting, but you have to choose it. We don’t do it for you. We cannot, nor would we if we were asked. You have been gifted with free will and you must understand that the arithmetic teacher does not do the equation for the student. That is her work to learn it. She may show it on the blackboard, “This is the arithmetic equation, you can learn yourselves,” and she may correct your paper, but you do your own work. The teaching we are gifting you with now and for the weeks to come will continue to be an initiatic teaching. And initiatic means you are required to learn certain things to move forward and up the mountain. Here we go, everybody. We are saying these words for you: “Each day I know myself in a new way. Each day I know myself in an agreement to who I truly am. Each day I say ‘yes’ to the mountain before me and as I climb the mountain in my awareness I agree to perceive only truth.” Underline those words in your mind, if you like, only truth. Now what is not real will present itself to be witnessed and perceived. But the eyes that know the truth will only see the truth and what is real before her. The claim we make for you now you are choosing, the Christed Self as the True Self —you choose the Divine as you—does not make you a small person with a
bright light. It means the wholeness of who you are is brought forward in her full expression. Now when you decide that this is okay, you can do it when you feel like it, “Let’s play the game of the light,” you will have the game of the light, which is a flickering lantern on the doorstep to a door that is mostly closed. Here we go: “On this night I choose to light the path with the truth of who I am. And the truth of who I am, the Divine Self I am, will lead the way up the mountainside before me. I sing my song as I walk through the shadows. I know who I am, what I am, how I serve, and I see before me only truth.” Here is an example of this: Someone harms you. You can perceive the self as harmed, you can see the one before you as harmful, or you can make a new decision. The Divine exists in all opportunity, and an opportunity before you like this is to claim the Divine Self outside of the harm. Who is ever harmed but the personality self? Do you understand this? The Divine Self, or the Christed Self, the truth of who you are, cannot be harmed. When you self-identify through the lower nature, you are setting yourself up for hurt and for fear. But when you know who you are, which is your teaching, “I know who I am in my truth,” you are unafraid and you are not harmed by the judgment of others, by their perceptions of you, and you are not controlled by the edicts of a culture that says you are not allowed to express yourself in this manner. Throughout time those who claimed the Christ, or the Divine Self, were persecuted in self-righteousness. Self-righteousness is righteousness of the small self. Do you understand this? You cannot be self-righteous and be the Divine Self. You are here and your light goes before you. The light never has to justify itself, nor will it ever. For the light to justify itself loses its potency and says to the darkness, “You have to know my name!” When did a lamp ever excuse her brightness in the dark room she illumines? You understand the teaching. We are teaching you very important things about the lives you will encounter as you attest to your own Divine worth. It is not a cakewalk; it is not a party for the small self. “Blessed are the ones who are persecuted, for theirs will be the Kingdom of Heaven.” What a horrible teaching, you may say. Here is what it means: When you are persecuted by lower nature, you are given the opportunity to rise, and in the lifting you are blessed.
When you are provoked to change, you may choose the way you change. When you are discussed, you have to listen, or not, depending on your requirements, but the name you hold, “I Am, I Am, I Am,” will not be persecuted. The small self, who invests in her purse, in her appearance, in her negotiations with her fellows, in the ways she requires to be known, may be persecuted in her expression, but the Divine Self who is there to be known is never harmed. “Well, enough of this teaching,” you say. “Who wants this?” We must explain to all of you that an initiatic path has certain requirements and the Christed Self, that which you truly are, will call into manifestation whatever circumstance she requires, whether or not it has to be out-pictured in your life, for you to know yourself through. This does not mean you call disaster to you. Why would you do that? It means you call opportunity to lift above the needs of the small self. “I have the need to be esteemed” calls to you the lessons in esteem. “I have the need to be justified” calls the lesson to you. “I have the need to be the worst one here” calls the lessons to you as well. And these are gifts, my friends. Don’t run from the room. He is not running from the room, and there are days he wishes he could,* but as we said to him and now we will say to you, “You don’t get off without your homework,” and when you do this work, you go into a new claim that there is nothing more important than the freedom of the True Self, that there is nothing more important than the liberation of the soul, that there is nothing more important than being in truth. We use the word “being” intentionally. When you are being in truth, it is your expression. Now truth itself is like the light. It does not need to justify itself because a lie will fall away in the face of truth no matter what is said or perceived, it will fall away in time because the vibration of truth is the higher. Now here we go: “On this night I claim that my jurisdiction, what I perceive—because as I perceive it is before me, and what I perceive is in my jurisdiction—is in alignment to the highest vibration available to me now. And as I lift the world before me to this agreement to be seen in worth and to be in accord with truth I dispel the lies, I move away the shadows, and the truth of who I am calls victory to me.”
Now we must explain to him what this means. The victory is not to the small self. The Divine Self claims victory over the lie; the darkness is dispelled by the light. This is never an act of the ego. Do you understand the teaching? Sometimes you seek justification in your landscape, “I will be proven right,” but the “I” that speaks those words is the small self who needs to be seen in justice. True justice is at a much higher frequency. The liberation of the free man is justice and any lies that were held against her, against him, will be dispelled because she cannot align to them. Now tonight we will take some questions, yes, but we have some other things to say. The first thing is for Paul: You did pass the test, if you wish to call it thus, and you have moved up the mountain. But the tendency you have, which is the same as most, is to continue to look behind you to see if you did it right. “What are the repercussions of my choice? What is being done? What is said?” And that is looking behind to the history to support your choice. In the present moment each one of you is free. When you go back and check your arithmetic on a test you passed in, you have to go back and redo it, to what end? If you didn’t answer the question right, you get to do it again, and not because you failed the damn thing, but because you are in school and in school you learn. So we say to him, yes, you moved through it, you are at the next stage, others will come soon. But we are teaching a class now to many and they all must understand that as they attend to this teaching they will call to them the opportunity to know the truth through the Divine Self and not through the small self who demands witness. Now he has a very good question and we will answer it. “When you have a person with low self-esteem, don’t they require to build the ego to be in worth?” Only up to a point. When you have a man who was told he was not worthy of this world, he may express himself in poverty in this plane and there are lessons he must learn to build the self-esteem to move him forward. But the Divine Self as him will be the one who leads him forward as he aligns to it. Each one of you calls the lessons you require to the self at the time you need it. So if what you need is esteem, and healthy esteem, we say “You know you have the right to be here just as you are” means you will call that lesson to you. Do you understand, yes? Now we say this last thing to all of you: You are being gifted tonight by a teaching in the book, yes, but by the truth of who you are, and we will do this all with you now. You will say this with us as you wish:
“I am allowing myself to be witnessed in truth. I am allowing myself to be seen as my True Self. And as my True Self is seen, I am aligned to the vision of who I truly am. And in this claim I am free of the need to be perceived in the small ways I have claimed as the victor, or the failure, as the thief, or the king. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.” We see you as you are. You are here, you are here, you are here. Truth be with you. We will take a moment for Paul, we will take your questions, yes. Stop now, please.
Q: How do we get stronger in acting from the place of the knowing of the Divine Self? Because I can flip into small self to large self, and I would like to act from the place of the Christed Self. Thank you for the question, and it’s the best question so far in the entire series. And we will tell you why: It is the teaching you are receiving. You want to maintain the high level. Many of you say, “How do I maintain the high level of vibration?” But what you said was, “How do I maintain my knowing and expression of my truth?” If you can begin to understand that the I Am Self is the truth of who you are, you can begin to go into alignment with it as the truth of who you are. The recognition that you have lived an entire life in validation of the small self’s needs, “What will make me look pretty?” “What will bring me honor?” simply means you are readdressing the self in a very different way. We do not discount the creations of man. Somebody with ambition had to build the building you sit in. Somebody one day made a decision that a book could be bound and the words shared with others. These are inspired things, but the manifestations of man on this plane of any incidence and worth have been inspired by the Divine within them. If you all understood that you don’t lose anything you require, truly require, by going into the knowing you require of who you truly are, you can move into the agreement you need. He is questioning this, too. He spends much of his day in worry or fear, but we are teaching you all now how to move beyond that and the text we will
deliver soon in mastery is the teaching you need to claim the foothold in the mountain you will climb. There are mountains to follow, yes, but the Divine as you who leads the way will begin to call to you each opportunity you need to reknow the self in the truth of who she is. The thing you think you must do is figure it out, and this is so true for all of you. The small self cannot figure it out. She cannot know herself at this level of vibration. The Divine Self as you will be the one who gifts you with what you require to claim the consistency of the act of knowing. Now when you know yourself in truth, you may be tested to deny it—“Who do you think you are to know yourself in this way?”—but that is an act of a requirement of one who is growing. To face the accuser, the one who says “no,” is a test and a level of growth. Thank you for the very good question. We will go to the next.
Q: When we seek justice for ourselves, or for something in our lives, is that the small self seeking it? Actually, yes, it is always the small self who seeks vindication. The Divine Self does not require it. Now there are things you may claim, “He punched me in the nose, he can pay for the surgery, he can pay for the crime,” but that is not necessarily the Divine Self who seeks revenge, or penance, or duty paid. You understand this, yes? That is the small self engaging in the law of the material realm, which is tit for tat and is the cause of all war. This does not mean you are a doormat. But the truth we speak to, the Divine Self as you, would never seek retribution, or justice, in the way you perceive it because she has no requirement for it. But we will correct you in one way: When you are in truth, you bring truth to all situations and the truth you bring to it may bring justice, but not through the act of revenge or recrimination, but because the light will shine and transform the injustice. Do you understand this, yes? The action of the Divine will do the work in a vastly different way than the personality self will in traffic court. Do you understand this, yes? Thank you for the very good question. We go to the next now.
Q: It says, “The small self cannot figure it out.” And my question was: Can you help me become more clear about my lesson now? Is that the small self trying to figure it out? Ask the Divine Self, because she knows. Do you understand this? We have taught this many times. When people come to Paul and they say, “What is my work, why am I here?” we always say that the Divine Self will call it into being once they begin to align to her. The claim “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve” implies that the service is a product of being. What you require to know to progress must be granted to you in order to progress, but it rarely comes from trying to figure it out. Now we do not discount the mind. If you are learning a new recipe in the kitchen, you hold the book before you. You test it out, you touch it, you taste it, you affirm it by eating it; you decide if it’s what you want. That is a process of the intellect. But knowing what you need, “I need to know myself in my worth,” will call to you the requirements of those things. Now when we say, “When you know, you are not thinking,” we are not discounting thinking, but we are telling you very simply that you will never know a damn thing by thinking. When you know, you are in alignment with knowing and there are no questions attached. Do you understand, yes? Thank you for the question.
Q: The Guides are talking about God, or the Divine, as being unable to be hurt. Am I hearing this correctly? I am being derailed by a doctrine that tells me that when we do anything wrong, we hurt God. If I was a teacher of this doctrine, I’ve led a whole lot of people down a wrong path. Is this the case and how do I correct that, and am I required to correct it? You are required to know the self differently. You are accountable to all your acts. There are answers to every question but often not until they are asked. When you know yourself as the one harming another, you are never acting in an awareness of your own divinity. You could not act that way and know yourself as Divine. When you harm another, in fact, you harm yourself because the negation of God within you is the penalty you pay. Do you
understand this? Now it can be rectified by the awareness of the Divine. It is never rectified by deciding you are a sinner and outside of God. Now the Christ as you, or the Divine as you, knows who she is. She is there in the darkest night and she is also there when you have shut the door to her expression. When you shut the door to her expression, you act in fear. When you act in fear, you call to you the very things that fear calls to you. But are you loved by the Creator even in that act of foolishness? Of course you are, because God cannot not love. Do you understand this? There is a vast mistake here. Mankind harms herself. He harms himself and others. The Divine could not harm. The Divine could not not care. But it cannot fix you or intercede without your alignment or willingness to know differently than you do. If you are justified in your act of hatred or in unforgiveness of another you have cut yourself off, you have not been cut off, and only cut off from your own expression and alignment to what is always present. This is the teaching of forgiveness and why you must forgive. When you don’t forgive, you trespass upon the True Self, not on the other. He could often care less what you think of him or her. You are the one being harmed because you are losing your own alignment that is always present. You are always loved, regardless of whether or not you know it, and the Creator is in everything regardless of whether or not you can perceive it. If God is all, it is all things. To be in alignment means to be in an awareness and expression of it, whether or not you know yourself as spiritual or even believe in God. You can be in very high alignment to All That Is and deny God because you call it something other. God could care less what you call it. The vocabulary is incidental. Call it the sky, call it truth, call it love, call it all that may be known. That is entirely up to you. But any doctrine that teaches you hell is a doctrine based in fear. Hell is what it feels like to be in the absence of the knowing of the Christed Self, or the Divine Self, or the True Self. It is not a place you go to, it is a level of consciousness that you have agreed to that can be transformed by the alignment to the Divine Self and by an awareness that God loves all, even you, and even the one you can’t stand. When you know that is so for the one you can’t stand, you are doing very, very well. Thank you for the fine question, we will continue.
Q: I had an experience this week where I was talking with a neighbor about another neighbor and she was conveying the difficult circumstances this person had. And rather than having the normal reaction, what I had instead was a deep appreciation for this neighbor and almost a sense of the way she serves within her difficulties and within her challenges in this life, and I was wondering if this was a correct response. “Correct” is the wrong word. You are using the word “correct” as if there is an incorrect way to respond. What you were expressing was an awareness of the Divine in your neighbor, which is always a high way to know. When someone is in their infirmity, or in a challenging circumstance, to become aware of the Divine in them serves them well and you are blessed as well by that awareness. When you go to the heart and it is aligned to light, it will bring the light to all. Do you understand this? We thank you for the good question. We will go to the next.
Q: As we learn about reclaiming the self, how do we relearn how to love in a way that we’re not so much in the small self but can align to the higher Divine Self, because a lot of our knowing comes from what we feel? The Divine Self loves through you. The small self doesn’t really love. She may get a crush, she may have a preference, but the Divine Love that flows through you may be expressed in many ways. The love of a mother to the child is Divine Love. It is not maternal love; it is love that holds no judgment and no contingency. “If he treats me well, I will love him” has nothing to do with love. Do you understand this? When you can love your enemy as yourself, you know love. When you can love another with no expectation of a return, you know love. When you think you know love, you think you know love. Love is the action of the Creator serving through you and expressing as you. You may say this if you like. All of you may say this if you wish: “I know myself in love. And as I know myself in love, I align to love and I express in love and I perceive with the eyes of the Christ who can know only
love.” The Divine Self as you loves as you. Do you understand this, yes? Thank you for the very good question.
— We want to say a few things about what we have done tonight for the reader and for the student of this work. We have instructed you in high ways, and the acting upon this knowing, the opportunities to act upon it, will be gifted to all of you as you say “yes” to the teaching. This is not a comfortable teaching. In some ways it’s very challenging. But the effects in your own vibration will be permanent as you agree to know who you are in this new love, in this new way, in truth. We thank you each for being with us. We have much, much more to say and as he gets out of the way more and more, it becomes less effortful to enjoy the self, the Divine Self, that we express through in your presence. We align to you now with these words: “We know who you are. You are here.” Thank you each and good night. Stop now, please.
Day Fifteen We speak to you now about your lives and what is to come. You were standing at the base of the mountain. You have moved beyond it. You are standing now in a new place, a new place of being. “Where do I stand?” you ask. In an encounter with your True Self. Now you have an idea of what the True Self is. You may have had experiences of it, but you have not integrated her, or him, if you prefer, in the ways you may need to know to move forward, to go forward, to lift yourself yet again. The integration with the True Self, the True Self identity as you, is what is to come at this stage of this journey you are choosing to be on. The requirement for this is a very simple one: alliance to the truth. Now we have been teaching you the truth and the responsibility to truth through the last chapter and we will continue, in some ways, to teach you truth as we progress.
When you are in alliance to something, you are in agreement with it and the alliance to truth on all levels, the agreement to be in truth on all levels, also aligns you to the True Self. If you are standing on the mountain, where you stand is where you may know yourself, and no other place. You may only know the self in the present moment. Do you understand this? The engagement you have received with us has lifted you so far, and at this stage of realization you may have come to the understanding that you have to forgive in order to progress and that you have to know yourself as sovereign in the face of all challenge. And that simply means that all that comes to you is an opportunity for your progress. Any interchange you have will always be at a place where you can recognize it as part of your path when you know who you are. Now when you witness the self as you stand today, you have ideas about what you are—“I wish my body was in better shape,” “I wish I did not have this malady that frightens me so,” “I wish I could change the way I see things to know who I truly am, but I get dismayed each time I see my reflection.” This is all fine. We don’t require you to be anywhere else than where you stand. Here we go: “I trust myself to know who and what I am despite all appearances to the contrary. I trust myself to see myself, to see myself as I truly am in the face of all challenge. I trust myself to be myself, my True Self, in alliance with the great I Am, the Cause of all light, the Cause of all things, the True Self of the self that I Am.” We speak to you now about a reckoning with the self, which will be the next stage of your development. A reckoning with the True Self simply means that you must see who you are in your divinity and, in order for this to be so, you must see where you hide, where you lie, where you agree to be less than you truly are. This is a challenge for most of you, yes, but it is an invitation to be granted freedom from the small self and her purview as the decider of your lives. When you go into the alliance we speak of, the agreement we tell you you have as the one claiming this, the small self still has her purpose but she is not charting the course of the vessel that is you. She is understood to have her preferences for what she likes to eat, where she likes to vacation, what she would choose to do in her free time, but the Divine Self as you calls into being all things. Underline
all things. All things come into agreement with the Divine Self when you have reckoned with yourself at this stage of development. Now as we have taught you in the past, a reckoning is a facing of the self and the creations the small self has made. If you would imagine, right now, that you are standing at a doorway, on the other side of the doorway is the Divine Self you are, the True Self, the True Created Self. She stands there waiting for you. He stands there waiting for you. His luminosity, her brightness, cannot be seen because the door precludes it. “What is the door?” Paul is saying. “What is this door you make between us and our True Selves?” Your fear, the creations of fear, the need to retaliate, the need to denounce, the need to decide from the lower self what can be and what should be. All of the creations of man that are born in lower nature. “Okay,” he says, “but if that is the door, why do we need it? Why can’t it be gone?” In fact, it is gone when you know who you are. You all must understand that the door is your creation. It is not there to protect you from the Divine Self. It is there to shield the false self from her own witness of her purview in the knowing of who and what she truly is. When the mask is rendered useless, the mask you have known yourself as, the Divine Self shines very brightly. But the woman who requires the mask and only knows herself through it would like to keep the door closed so she can continue on her way. You face this doorway now. You see the grain of the wood, perhaps. You may reach out and touch it. It is a creation. It is a door that has been made and anything that has been made can be remade, can be re-created. There are many ways to open the door. You can reach for the handle and pull it inward. You can take an axe to it if you feel that is best, or you can simply ask that the door be opened, that the door be lifted, that the door be reborn in a new way where you are allowed to reckon with the truth of who and what you are. The doorway is here. You face the doorway. If you wish the doorway to be gone, you will say these words, but know that when you say these words you are calling into manifestation an agreement of great importance. This is not a quick fix. This will not be done in a second, but it will be done, and if you say these words and you know that they are true, your life will be transformed by what happens next.
“On this day I choose to give myself permission to open the door to my own Divine Self so I may see myself in my truth, as I truly am. Today I give permission for the door to be removed, to be lifted, to be gone so that I may be in full encounter with my Divine Self and know her as she is, as he is. Today I give permission to all that would support me, all the powers and virtues, all the light and those of the light, to bring to bear the choice I am making. And today I say ‘yes’ to what lies beyond the doorway. And here I am, in my small self, saying, ‘I know who I am,’ in gratitude for the knowing that I now have that this is so.” Here you go, everybody. If you have said these words, what you have just done is rung the clarion bell for your own lives to shepherd this into being. “But what will happen?” Paul is asking. He imagines behind the doorway a fiery being, a being so bright that it is frightening to his eyes. He would wish to run from it, to not know, to not be seen by the aspect of the self that is so pure. “What will happen to me?” he cries. “Where will I go, what will I do?” His imagination runs rampant. Here is what lies beyond the door: True love. True Christ in manifestation. True Being in the knowing of who and what you are. The being behind the door is you, my friend, without fear. The being behind the door, my friend, is love without decision. The being behind the door is truth in alliance to all the truth that is. Here we go again: “I free myself of the fear of my encounter with my Divine Self. I free myself of the limited self that would hide from this encounter. And as I say ‘yes,’ I say ‘yes’ to all that will be in this reckoning. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.” We see you now before us. And we see the doorway open and we see, in reunification, the small self being absorbed by the Divine Self. And as you witness this in vibration, in acceptance, in an acknowledgment that this is so, you give thanks for your alliance, for your agreement to see, and to know, and to be with this thing that is the truth of who you are.
Now the Christ as you, in many ways, has been our teaching, but it has been, in many ways, suffering from your idealization of what this means. You confuse the man on the cross with who you are, and that is not who any of you are. You are all Divine Beings incarnating on your path. The Christ is the manifestation of God in man, who you truly are. When you opened the door, you integrated, on a level of agreement, the Divine Self that has been waiting for you in manifestation. You are here, you are here, you are here. Now we will take Paul’s question, he is hiding in the corner with a long list of them. “What happens next?” he asks. Here is what happens next: You will be required, in many situations, to remember to be the self that is high and you will not align to the memory of what was as a course of action. Because you did it this way yesterday will not mean you do it this way today. Because you were someone else yesterday does not mean that will be your expression today. You are facing the self in all of your encounters. Now the face you see in your encounters will show you where you stand, will show you your alliance and agreement to the Divine Self. The integration of this into your lives is a process of agreement and layers of agreement as we ascend the mountain with you. The imprinting has been done today in the opening of the door in the field that you are in. And by opening the door and arriving at this stage, stage two, if you like, up the mountainside, the reckoning with the self, the facing of the self, you are moving toward a process of reclamation in your vibration of your True Being. It will encounter you in different ways. You are aligning to truth and, as we have said, the alignment to truth cannot be feared. Truth, we will say, is never fearful because it is in your knowing, and when you know, you are not afraid. The alliance you have in truth, “I know who I am in truth, what I am in truth, how I serve in truth,” removes the veils of selfdeception that you have operated through. When you are in truth, you cannot be deceived by the small self’s requirements to know herself in the encounters with others in the ways she has decided they should be. She is unchained from the expectations of her historical self because the claim of freedom, “I am here,” has been known and sung in the field you hold. As you choose to go on this journey, as you align to it each step of the way, you give thanks for the lessons that come. If something happens in your life that requires you to see yourself as you truly are—and that includes in those ways that you have believed yourself to be, but are not, in truth—you will give thanks for the opportunity to learn.
The path that you are on as we go up the mountain is the path of the Christ, of the Awakened Self who must see all things in the eyes of the Christ and not be deceived by the names things have been granted in low vibration. Paul had a question; we want to take it. “What do we do when we see injustice? Are we to bless it? How do we act? Do we fight when we see the need for a fight?” Here is the true answer: When you are acting in fear, you may disguise it in many ways. The need for justice, in many ways, may be the need to reclaim a self that has been maligned. We will say to each of you the freedom you have to grow will call to you the circumstances that you need to participate in to continue to evolve. The question of “What does one do when one perceives injustice?”—underline perceive because you may be perceiving through history and not in truth—will be called forward to you by what is required. The action of the Divine Self is called forward in all circumstance. It is not prescribed by the intellect. When you know how you serve, you also know how to respond to everything that is called into manifestation before you. Do you see this? Do you comprehend this teaching? If you decide in advance that there is one response to one situation, you are prescribing it. The Divine as you, who knows who she is, will prompt the action that is required by you on whatever level is appropriate. You see a kitten in the mud; you use your hands to pick up the kitten. You are called to action by circumstance. But do not assume that how you were told to respond to something, or not to respond, is something that is accurate and a requirement. The Divine Self as you will call you into manifestation in whatever circumstances are required. Now we will say this to all of you as we end this section today, and we will say that this section will seal the last chapter. We will continue tomorrow with what we need to teach you about the encounter with the self that you are seeing before you. We thank you each for your presence. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.
CHAPTER EIGHT
FREEDOM AND RESPONSIBILITY Day Sixteen
W
e will ask you questions today about responsibility. What are you responsible to? Everything you see before you. How are you responsible to it? By consciously becoming aware of the truth that inhabits all things. As we go back to the idea of perception, we wish to bring to it a new understanding. What you see before you you are responsible to, and, as the one responsible, you must attend to it in consciousness. Now someone in low consciousness who is not vibrating at a high level will attend to something he sees in the only way he knows: through the idealization of the thing before him as what it appears to be. As you lift your vibration, the appearances change: What appears to be injustice may be seen as something very different; what is seen as a great opportunity may be perceived differently as well. We do not wish to codify your responses to things, but we will tell you this much: Very lovely things can often conceal a low vibration, and what appears to be low may actually be the opportunity to lift to a high place, not only for the individual who perceives, but by all who encounter it. The temptation to make a decision, or a decision that you would have made through what you were taught to see, is very different than the decision that you will make through your own knowing in alignment to truth. Now when you vibrate in truth, all things are seen differently. You all idealize truth in a certain way as something you can understand. “I know the truth of the situation� simply means to you that you have decided it. To know the truth of any situation, the
true truth, the only truth that lies beyond the layers of misperception, would be that “I know that I am seeing the Divine.” Now how do you do this when what you perceive before you seems harmful, or ugly, or violent? You do not see the violence at the first level. This does not mean that you do not attend to what you see. If you are required to attend to it, you must, in all ways. But to idealize the violence, in fact, perpetuates it. When you rise above yourself, or the smaller self, in consciousness, you actually have the opportunity to lift the very thing that you would idealize as awful to a new plane of identification. This is mastery. “Look at that terrible thing over there!” claims the terrible thing and gives it great power. You invite others to agree in the terribleness of the thing you have just seen and you go into a collective agreement about what is wrong. What you are not doing in that intention is lifting your perception to the high road, seeing what lies beyond the first layer of what you know to what is truly there beneath it. You see the flower growing from the earth, but you are seeing the result of a process. You do not know what lies beneath the soil, the rich and beautiful soil, because you cannot perceive it with the naked eye. As you claim your identity, “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve,” you will be confronted in your worlds with the opportunity to see many things and lift them. “Why should we lift something awful? If something is awful, it is dreadful, we will attend to it as dreadful and change it that way.” When you opportunize any situation that you are basing in judgment, in fact you are defining your response in opposition to the very thing you say you don’t like. When you operate in opposition, actually you reinforce the very thing you wish to see transformed. “Hatred ceases not with hatred” is a teaching that you may understand here. Here we go: “As I lift my sight to perceive the truth in all things, I agree to the opportunities that present themselves to me to lift the thing I see to the highest level of vibration that I may know it as. As I claim this, I do my duty to my own Divine Self to witness truth in all manifestation regardless of what I wish to claim through my heritage, my history, and the things of this world. As I claim my freedom as the one in choice, I align my vision only to truth, and here I stand at this juncture of perception in wonder. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.”
Period, period, period. “Here we go” is the new claim for forward motion up the mountainside. Now Paul has many questions: “You are teaching us pacifism. You are asking us to let things happen, to do nothing in the face of a challenge or the face of a crime.” You have all believed that it is your hands that do the work, the heavy lifting that makes the change you wish to see, but that is not so. Vibration does the work much more quickly and to much greater benefit. When you perceive something in the high way and you lift it to its true nature, in fact you are not denying what you see, you are supporting its lifting to the investment of the Divine, where it may live in a high vibration. When you have something low and you lift it high, it is no longer low. That’s a very simple example. “But does it work?” he is asking. “Please tell us it works.” Of course it works. Here we go again: You are wandering up a mountainside and you see a man crawling in the dirt. You offer to help him lift, you bring him to his feet, he falls again. You are supporting him with your weight and you are getting weary from the work. When you invest in your own energy field, “I will fix this thing. I will make this right,” you are operating from the low self. Here is how we would operate: We lift the man to his feet, perhaps, but we hold him in the vision of wholeness. We know, and underline know, that all manifestation is of God. If the man is hungry, we feed him, yes, because things of this realm that need to be attended to in the physical realm through physical gesture and action will not be ignored. But the idealization of the pain the man is in, “Oh, see the crippled man, he cannot walk, how do we attend to him?” would include the investment in him of Divine Truth. “I lift the one before me with the eyes of the Christ. I see him in his beauty. I see him in his wholeness.” Now Paul is asking, “Does this heal the man? Is that what you are teaching us? That would be too much.” As long as it is too much in your consciousness, it will not be achieved. The master, in fact, begins to move beyond physical law as a restraint for what may be achieved. We will tell you this, though: At whatever level of vibration you hold, witnessing the one before you with the eyes of the Christ, claiming the Divine as them—“I know who you are, what you are, how you serve”—respects the truth of the being before you and lifts his vibration.
Now you sometimes assume that man should be walking proudly up the side of the mountain beside you, but you forget that you claim different things in a lifetime. You claim infirmity for different reasons. At an essence level you are completely whole, but you learn many things in the physical realm through the physical challenges that you encounter, and it would be presumptuous for you to assume that man that is crawling in the dirt is not doing what he requires to learn his lessons. This does not stop you from helping him, from attending to the need that you can see clearly in the physical and in the Divine, but it does not mean that you are there to fix him or that your intention to see him in his wellness should make him well. Understand this, please: You make no one well. The Divine as you, the claim of the Christ, the Creator as you, doeth the work, do you understand this? For those of you who claim yourself as healers, you must be aware that that is another title, another name tag that the ego likes to glorify. Until you understand that of yourself you do nothing, the Divine within is the active principle, you will be lying to yourselves and seeking glory for your actions. The Divine Self will never seek glory for her actions, for the simple reason that she has no need for glory. All glory is given to the Creator. Do you understand this? Now the man on the mountainside who crawls along may actually have been placed there to give you the opportunity to learn a lesson. The lesson in helping the one less fortunate would be the obvious lesson, but he may be your great teacher. When you decide to turn away from him, you turn away from your opportunity to change. Angels come, Divine Beings come in many forms, and they rarely show themselves in all their light because you would all run from them. There are energies operating through mankind in extraordinarily high ways and, in most cases, those vibrating at the highest frequencies have left their worlds, seek very private lives in meditation. Now this is done for the good of all. If you can understand this, when you are a generator of vibration and you operate at that level, you are called to world service to hold the grid, if you wish, of the Christ vibration for all mankind. The teaching we offer you does not require you to become a nun and enter a convent. The work we teach you is about entering the life that you have chosen at the highest degree of Christed Self that you may know as yourselves in this vibration. The attunements you have been given are very powerful, but they will only lift you to the level you have attended to.
You can imagine an electrical circuit that holds a lightbulb at the end. If you turn the light on, it will be a bright bulb. If you put too much voltage through the bulb, the circuit will blow. It cannot attend to it. What we are doing with you is actually escalating the level of consciousness, of vibration, of light that you may adhere to. We are actually rewiring you in your consciousness by showing you who you are and attending to you as the one in choice. Now as we teach you today, we need to do some things for you to assist you in comprehension. We will take Paul’s question in a bit. He is in the back row waving his hand, saying, “Teacher, teacher, I still don’t understand something.” There will be time for questions when there is time. Here we go: The need you have now, all of you, is to decide for yourselves that anything you see you are responsible to and must attend to in consciousness. This does not prohibit you from acting in the physical realm. Far from it. The Divine as you will call you forward in service in whatever way is required. Service means you are in offering as yourself. That could mean feeding the poor, yes, it could also mean lifting the vision of an atrocity to the level of God so that there may be a new way of attending to something than there has yet been on this plane. As we have taught you, you believe in war. There has always been war, so you expect war and you will have war. And if there is more war, you all stand a very good chance of not habitating this plane in the ways you have known it. So you have an opportunity, if you wish, to lift the vibration of the level that you see before you to the highest available to you. If you perceive atrocity and you claim this—“I see this before me in truth”—and you lift your vision of it, you align the highest level of the Creator that you can idealize to support the transformation of the thing you see in low self. How you perceive anything is what it means. Do you understand this? One man can see a crucifixion and say, “Good-bye and good riddance,” and another one may weep and another one may take the body from the cross. You all attend to things at the level of consciousness that you give meaning to. Here we go with you again: “I know who I am. And as I know who I am, I align my True Self to the manifestation of all things. I understand, I agree, I say ‘yes’ to the opportunities presented to me to lift the world to its true nature.” “What is the true nature?” Paul is asking.
It is the Kingdom. It is here, but you must perceive it. All things must be lifted, finally, to this vibration, and this will happen in time. You are the emissaries, you are the eyes of God as you witness. When you lift your sight to your creations, when you see who you are as the one who may be in choice at this level of service, you are granted the work that is necessary. “Well, I don’t want work, I just want to be a happier person. There’s a house I’ve always wanted to buy and my children aren’t doing very well in school. That’s what matters now.” That matters to the small self, yes, and we don’t deny your claims and needs. This is not kindergarten anymore. We took you through a process in the first three texts of remembering and claiming worth, and the work of these books is far greater than your individual contentment. We have nothing against that, but the mountain that you are choosing to climb is a glorious mountain. It is a noble journey and we encourage you, if only for a moment, to understand that your participation on this journey supports a change in the landscape that you share with all mankind. We are taking you on a journey for a reason, and the mountainside before us has great opportunity to show you what you are in your vibration. When you leave the house today, or when you watch the television and you see something you would judge as a terrible thing, we wish you to do this exercise: “As I witness this thing, I align to truth, to the Creator who will see through me. And I move beyond what I have been taught to feel to the true vision of the self who knows who she is. I see the truth and I lift what is before me to the manifestation of the Divine. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve.” You will feel the shift once you make the choice not to participate in the lower vibration. If you could all understand that when you agree to a low-vibratory thing you are in consort with it, you will understand that every time you see the news and you are taught to feel terrible you are in consort with the very thing you wish to see differently. When you see the truth in something, you are actually instigating change—you are helping to transform the thing to the truth of the Divine. Now if you understand that the Divine Self knows no fear and cannot perpetuate fear, you will understand that this teaching will never cause fear. If you encounter it on your path, it’s as an opportunity to overcome. The Christ as
you sees the well-being, sees the action of the Creator lifting all things. When there is a battle, you may enter the fray if you choose by pulling out your sword, or you may lift the battlefield to the level of vibration where there are no swords. Do you understand this example? It’s very important for you to understand that this is an active thing and it does change. We use your hands well in service. Each man who serves will be given the tools with which to serve through, but in the decision to see the truth in what is before you—which is the Divine action making any corrections that may be required, because the action of the Creator is only in love—you do far more. Now as we complete this teaching for the day, we will offer you this. When you are confused by the teaching, there is a very simple remedy: “I am aligning to the truth of this teaching. I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.” We teach through Paul, you see, and his resistance at times actually shows you, perhaps, your own. But we are teaching well and for the good of all and we offer you this: You need not be afraid of the journey before you. When it rains and you feel the rain upon your skin, don’t run and hide from it, let it wash you clean. When you feel the sun beating on your cheeks, be grateful for warmth that you have been given. And when you meet the man on the road, whether he is standing or crawling in the mud, witness the Christ in him—“I see you with the eyes of the Christ”—and ask the Divine Self that you are how to best attend to the need of the circumstance. You will be shown. We will speak to you tomorrow. Thank you and good night. Stop now, please.
Day Seventeen Let each one know that they are worthy of this teaching. Here we go: “As I learn who I am, I am required to know all things as they truly are. As I know myself in my worth, I hold the ideal for others to claim their own.
As I see with the eyes of the Christ, I anoint others to the witnessing that is their birthright. All will come to the altar in their own way. As I stand before them, I sing my song in love. As I stand before them, I sing the praise of All That Is. And as I stand before them, I align to each one for the benefit of all.” Now we say these words to you intentionally: The requirement for change at this level of incarnation is to bless all that you see. Hear these words: What you bless, you lift; what you damn, what you curse, you cast out. Now when you cast something out, you align it to the darkness and there has been a teaching that things should be cast to the darkness for the good of all. But what is cast to the darkness grows in force, and the intention of the darkness, as you understand it, is to cast a shadow to preclude the light, to stand in its own defiance. When you lift something to the light, you give it the opportunity to heal. When you cast something into the darkness, you actually give it power. So the intention to damn anything you see, to put it outside of God, is actually to empower it. Blessing all that you see, even when it disguises itself in great fear, will support you in aligning to the light that will dispel the darkness. Now this is very imperative teaching for each of you, because as you undergo this transition into the True Self, the tests that come, the ways to meet the self as the True Self, show themselves in different ways. And the idealization of who and what we are means nothing until you have your own expression as the Divine Self. Now as the Divine Self, the one you met on the mountainside, you claim things, and what you claim you empower. The Christed Self who understands what is in truth, and sees all things with the eyes of light, can only call to her those things she is in alignment to. How would she call something that she would perceive in darkness to her? Only in the light, and that is by blessing what you see. Now some of you believe if you bless something, you condone it. “Look at that terrible thing, I cannot bless that terrible thing.” To understand what a blessing is is very important, and a blessing is the placement of God upon the thing you see. If you can imagine this, that there is a dark being slithering on the floor, you can run from the dark being, or you can bless the dark being. By blessing the dark being, you bring the light to it, you
bring the action of the Divine to bear on this very thing, and it transforms, in its own way, to meet the choice of being blessed. Now Paul has questions about this: “Okay, we bless the dark being and it still bites us in the rear. What good was the blessing?” To anoint something in God, to perceive it in its worth regardless of what it presents, will shift you to the awareness of the Divine in all things. When you curse something, you cast it out. What you put outside of the light, you attach to. Do you understand? The teaching you are getting is to clarify your relations to all you see before you, all and each one, yes. Now the dominion you hold in your responsibility will be kept forward by your intention to perceive in alignment with the Christ. What that means is, when your eyes are forward, when they see what is before them, they illumine the path. The Divine as you will do this with you and as you, yes, as you give praise and bless what you see. Now here is the other question Paul has, and it’s a very important one for some of you. “We were taught to claim the Word through what we see before us, ‘I am Word through this situation, Word I am Word.’ Is that still a true teaching?” It’s a very true teaching and it is its blessing. However, when we use the term “blessing,” we are actually teaching the mind to comprehend the life that can be lived as the Christed Self. To claim, “I am Word through this thing I see before me,” brings to bear the action of the Creator upon this thing that you witness. The consciousness, however, is not implied. You don’t understand that what you are blessing by claiming, “I am Word,” has the right to be there. When you bless something, it is acknowledged in a very different way. You are attending to it as the shepherd, and that is a word we use intentionally. You become a shepherd, you see, and the shepherd who sees his flock in love lifts the flock. Now this does not mean you become leaders, that you start a school, that you have people following you. That is not at all the case. But it does mean that as you lead on your path, you are incarnated as the shepherd, the one who calls forth and shows the way to those who will follow in their own way. Now there is no one here who attends to these words who isn’t suggesting to themselves, “Oh no, what does this mean? I have to be this thing in the way they say?” In fact, that is not the case. What you be is what you are, and what you be is the expression of the Divine. By example, you can say you lead, but more importantly, by your field, by the vibration you hold. There is a level of
dialogue, of touch, of exchange that goes far beyond the spoken word, or the hand, or the skin. There is an exchange of vibration in occurrence in all matter, and every thought you have, high and low and in between, actually has impact. At the level of alignment we are teaching you, the impact of thought becomes very quick and you are obligated, at a certain level, to begin to monitor the thoughts you hold because they call forth the things that are necessary to be in accord with them. Now this frightens Paul. “So, if I wish somebody harm because I am in a bad mood, I call that to myself? What are you really saying?” Yes, that is what we are saying, and it has always been so. What you wish upon another you claim to yourself, and that is the law of karma. “Like attracts like” is a way to understand that what you call into being you are claiming for yourself and if you hold the thought of something, you are claiming it. You are the one choosing. Now on an initiatic path you have to encounter things. And we said stage two on the journey up the mountain was the facing of the True Self, the Divine Self who holds you, who teaches you, who shepherds you up the mountainside as you align to her and become the shepherd that she is. When you teach yourself at this level of vibration, in fact, what is happening is a kind of alchemy, a kind of training where you call forth what you need to grow through to be in alignment with it. The frequency you hold is what is doing this work. Now we will tell you this, because he is interrupting and asking this question, “Do we need to be frightened of our thoughts?” What a ridiculous idea. Your thoughts are your purview. There is nothing to be frightened of in your thoughts, but there is accountability at a certain level to know that your vibration is inclusive of the thoughts that you hold. Now if somebody steps on your foot and you say, “That jerk, I hope he gets it back,” you are calling that to you in a way, but it is not the end of the world. Nobody is going to come and step on your foot. You are simply acknowledging in low agreement the event that occurred and claiming it, or damning it, if you wish, in your way. Now praise and damning are very different intentions. There has been a teaching to turn the other cheek and we have explained that in previous texts, but we will support you now in what it means to rise above any situation that could present itself. If you can imagine above you is a trapeze, and there is a man on the trapeze with his hands lowered, waiting to lift you and bring you up to a higher level,
you can imagine that the Higher Self, or the Christed Self, is available in any situation to support you in this manner. The manner we teach you, and will continue to teach you, is thus: When you sing your song, you call to you what you need. And to request the Higher Self, or the Divine Self, to lift you in any situation say “yes” to the possibility that you may be lifted. But so often in your reactive natures you throw your tantrum first, and in doing that you align to low consciousness, and you tend to stay there until you wear yourself out or it occurs to you that it is doing you no good at all. “But do we become sheep?” Paul is asking. “This sounds like we become very low. We do not speak out at the one who steps on the foot, we lift?” You may speak out all you like, but what level are you addressing? The one who has risen also has a voice. We are not teaching silence, we are teaching responsibility, and how you attend to anything you see before you is what you are learning in the exchange. When a parent yells at a child, that is a way of expressing, and all parents are known to yell, and it is one way of teaching, but not the only way. To fight back is one way of being expressed to correct a situation, or attempt to, but it is not the high way. From the platform you have been lifted to upon the trapeze you see differently, you see with the higher perspective and, consequently, you may address it as such. Those of you who read this text will be changing your world, and not just for your own good but for those that will follow. The manifestation of this frequency on this level of plane of expression is actually transformational to all things. As each one of you who attends to these words claims their purview, knows their authority, and begins to lift the things they see before them as they have been instructed, they become party to the orchestra and the chorus that is attending to the transformation of this plane now. There are many beings, many energies, all in love, serving you now and serving all of you. Certainly not just those of you who have discovered these books and are learning the teachings—all men are being transformed. If you can understand that so many of you are learning things in ways you never thought you would and so many become confused at a landscape that appears to be in chaos, you can understand the value of being lifted and holding the high view. It allows you to call down from your platform at the ones you see before you and say, “See this way, there is a different way, you can put down your swords, you can learn a new song.” Now this is done through vibration, but many of you will be called to act, and to be called to act means to become accountable to the physical realm as an
energy, a source of vibration in action. It matters not what you do for a living. It matters not at all what your resources are. What does matter is that when you are called to act in any situation and you are in alignment with the Divine Self, you will know what to do. And that includes doing nothing, if that is the highest choice available to you. Paul is seeing the image of the mother lifting the car over the child who has been struck. She finds the inner resources to do what was impossible and, when it is done and the child is safe, she says, “I didn’t know I could do that, how could that have been so?” She was using Divine strength, she was not even thinking. As she lifted the car, she knew what she had to do and it was done through her. The manifestation of God in man is a great thing, but you all deny it and limit what can be done. “Well, that’s all well and good, the woman lifted the car. It was a freak incident.” If you want to call God a freak incident, that is your right. But if you decide that the power of the Creator operating through you is much more powerful than you can imagine, you will stop limiting the Creator and yourselves—and underline and yourselves. You are miraculous beings. We have been you, some of us, in flesh and in form, and some of us know you in deep love only from the ethers. But we can promise you this: You are far more than you know or have ever been taught. The species you are is in evolution. There are times, on the level of transformation on a plane, where things get to transform because the opportunities have been presented, and this is that time for you, for all of you, at whatever stage of awareness you may have attended to thus far. Now the crucibles you face on this journey are always ways to learn. Every step of the way there is another lesson that will be met by you as the Divine Self, and you know you meet your training, your lessons, as you respond as your Divine Self to what presents to you and not as the small self who knows herself through fear, or pride, or any of the other things that she believes herself to be full of. The Divine as you, who exchanges with others, learns through the exchanges to honor the ones she sees before her, regardless of what they present, in order to lift them, and she is lifted and graced in this choice to claim it for another. Now here we go:
“On this day I decide to let go of any need to be right, any need to control another, any need to claim authority at the cost of someone else. Today I choose to be re-created in a higher way that knows the Source of her authority, knows the Source of the beauty of all and claim it in this way: I know who you are, I know what you are, I know how you serve. I am Word through the one I see before me.” Now we ask you this: Who is the one person on the path that you would like to avoid on this journey up the mountain? Who is the one person that you would damn, that you would deny, that you would claim outside of the light? We would like you to do an exercise with us now. Imagine that you are standing at the face of a cave. And inside this cave there appears to be only darkness, but you allow yourself to enter. As you enter this dark space, you claim your own vibration, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here,” and the light that you are illumines the cave. And what you see before you is the one being you would put outside of God. See her before you, see him before you, and know this to be true: By placing them in darkness, you have been invited to join them there in the cave. This is what we would like you to do: See the one before you in her worth, in his worth, and claim them in their freedom. “I see you in your beauty. I see you in your right to be. I see you and, as your witness, I liberate you from the darkness I have cast you into.” And then you will offer them your hand and lead them out of the cave into the light. This is a very strong meditation. You must understand that by leading another to the light that you have placed in darkness you free yourself from the cave. Every time you think of that being, you step into the cave with them, you enter the dark place that you have claimed them in. By leading them to the light, by seeing them in their worth, you liberate yourself from the ties that bind you.
When you align them to the light, you are untied; they are free and you are free as well. Now some of you will struggle with this exercise, and you may alter it if you wish to tell them what you feel when you enter the dark cave. “I hate what you did, I hate what I became, I am still fearful, I am still angry,” whatever you may need to claim, but still bring the light to them. Let them be lifted by the frequency of the light you are and then extend your hand and lead them out. You do this not for their benefit, but for your own. They have been your teacher in a very high way, because those that would call you to the darkness are actually teaching you to know the light. Do you hear these words? They are good words, they are true words, and you may hold them and know that they are so. Now the relationships you have, in many ways, are the reflections of the consciousness you hold. And when we return tomorrow, we will teach you about those things that you require yourselves to know to navigate the families and the partners and the ones you meet and never meet on your journey forward. We leave you on the mountainside today, not at the top of the acrobat’s pole, but at the side of the mountain. And we ask you to sit for a moment just where you are and look up at the sky and become aware of how far you have come on this journey already. “I see how far I’ve come and I give thanks for who I am.” We thank you each for your attention to this journey. Good night. Stop now, please.
CHAPTER NINE
RE-CREATION OF THE SELF Day Eighteen
W
e are with you now. Wherever you are, we stand beside you willing to usher you up the mountainside to the next stage of evolution that you may encounter. This is a day of glory and a day of awakening for all of you who encounter these words. The tribunal has been set and mankind, if you wish, has agreed as a whole to align herself to what may be upside the mountain. Now we said “upside,” and “up the side” would be perfectly fine, but we are going to turn things on you today, just a little bit. You must understand that when you walk up a mountain, the intention is to rise. You have been told not to look behind you, not to stare down at what you now perceive to be a great distance between yourself and the lives you have lived. When we are teaching you today, we are actually going to teach you something different about who you are and how you may know yourselves in your relations. The man you are, Paul, sitting before us, the woman you are, Victoria, on the telephone, the reader, wherever she is, knows herself in her engagements. She is reminded of the names she has claimed in all of her encounters. At the grocery store you may be the customer or the clerk, at the school you may be the student or the principal. You all have your name tags, you see, and you change them as the day goes on, as you encounter others on the terms you have all agreed to be in encounter through. Today, we say to you, the game is over. And this has been the game: “I will meet you in an expectation of how you will meet me. I extend my hand to you in
peace; I expect the hand to be received. I offer my heart to you in love; I expect my heart to be received.” Now the expectations you carry, in many ways, are about how you are to be responded to, to know your name in an engagement with someone else. You have no guarantee when you walk into a room whether or not you will be met with laughter or with tears, with joy or with envy. You have no way of knowing what another holds in her field that she is seeking to release as the encounter with you progresses. Now each one of you decides certain things prior to incarnation, and that includes many of the people that you will encounter and exchange with. And you are choosing this, not because it’s so much fun, but because you have so much to learn and you agree, prior to coming onto this plane, that there are lessons you will learn through each other. So when you go into a room, the best way to enter is in an expectation of love, but not the kind of love that requires somebody to jump in your arms, or to wish you well, or to agree with your behavior. So many of the people you meet that cause you the most difficulty have come to show you who you are, high and low and in between. These engagements are extraordinarily powerful, and the ones you know yourselves through most closely are the ones you are born into as a family. Now your family engagements must be discussed briefly. Paul is asking, “Oh dear, don’t tell us we choose our parents.” Well, of course you do, and the siblings as well, but for very different reasons than you think. Everybody that you meet has their own agenda for learning and very often you elect to incarnate with those who will serve you with the lessons you require. It’s not because you have so much to catch up on karmically, so many debts to be repaid, so much to be responded to through old history. In most cases, you are electing to be born into a home where you may be served with the primary lesson of your life. Many of you come here to learn who you are through engagements with family. And the imprinting of a family, high and low and in between, is what you encounter as the basic way you have self-identified. “I am the youngest and the cutest,” “I am the one they don’t like,” “I am the savior of the family,” or “the shameful one.” “I am not good enough because that’s what I was told,” or “I will succeed at all costs because that was the expectation.” Now as you go forward, as you create a life, you wear all those name tags still. Imagine you are wearing a uniform from every job you ever had, high jobs
and low jobs, it matters not, but imagine that your job title was a pin you are wearing all around the world. “I am the shepherd,” “I am the chemist,” “I am the one who knows where the books are in the library,” “I am the one who cleans the house.” You would get very confused, eventually, if everybody was looking at you and asking you to clean their house when you are no longer a housecleaner. But in many ways, the names that you carry from your childhood are doing just that and everybody can see them on an energetic level, even if you don’t think they’re there. “I am the one who never gets it right” is a name tag you wear in self-identification. Now if you wish to come up the mountain with us, we need to do it without clothing, or the uniform of the old self. You may don something else if you like, whatever you wish, but do not wear the name tags that were sewn onto your blouse, pinned to your lapel, or in your underwear. It’s time to move beyond what you have known as the self who knows herself in relation to others. If you wish to walk with us now, we would like to take you on a little trip to a gallery, perhaps, with many pictures hung on the walls. Look around you, please, and imagine that the walls you stand before are decorated with paintings of everyone you have ever met. The gallery would go on forever, you have had so many encounters. Now invite the ones that have no real need to be there, to be witnessed, to move, and let the ones that are there, that are important to be seen, remain. The ones you see before you now are the ones you chose to engage through, to know the self through and to develop. We want you to thank each one present, if you wish by name, if you wish in an agreement to their own right to be where they are right now hung on the wall. But we wish you to acknowledge them and say these words: “I am free of the names I have carried. I am releasing the need to be known through the names I have used. I am acknowledging my freedom from any agreements I have made with any of you to know myself through the identity I chose in my relation with you.” And as you say these words, we want you to begin to walk again down a corridor to another gallery. Everybody in that gallery is whole. Everybody who stands around you, wanders around the room, is a luminous being and knows themselves free of the name tags that they have worn.
You have come to the Gallery of the Whole Being, and the Whole Being no longer self-identifies through matter but through spirit. So the beings you see before you are luminous because they don’t hold form in the ways that you have known. What you are actually seeing now is the True Self of each one you had seen the painting of. They are fellow travelers. They are, as you, on a journey home to their own reclamation of the True Self. Now if you acknowledge these beings, you will notice that they have no face. The ones you have known before were identified through their features in pigment on a canvas. The ones you see before you are in form as vibration, as love, in unity with their Source. And as you wander this room, understand, please, that each one you are encountering is one you had agreed to know prior to incarnation. Whatever their names were in this lifetime will be gone in the next. Whatever games they played in this lifetime will not be played in the next. Whatever you knew yourself through in relation to them will not be present as you move forward and progress up the mountain. So we will offer you this: We wish you to give thanks for the presence before you, for the presence of each one, because you have been gifted by the exchange with them. And as you move beyond personality as a way to know the self, you are aligned to the Infinite Spirit that is always present in each one you encounter. We take you farther down the hallway and there is a room with many pages in many books lining the walls. We wish you to sit before yourself at a mirror and open the book that is before you. This is the Book of Knowing and as you claim these words in this room, you receive the requirements to know your true gift in this plane, the thing you bring to the world in the most joyful way. You will say this, please: “On this day I choose to gift myself with the Book of Knowing. Today I gift myself with the information I require to receive. On this day I choose to hold to my heart the pages of this book so that I may remember and proceed on my journey with the awareness of my knowing. I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.” Now as we take you through these hallways, in fact we are taking you within the self, within the selves that you have known, if you wish, through your encounters with others.
Many of you have questions of a very practical nature. “How do I be on this path and maintain my relations?” “How do I know myself now with those who don’t know me as I am?” There is not one prescription for these questions, but when you operate in your knowing and you claim the true identity that you hold, you are gifted with the answers you need. When we write a text that is a self-help book, we will give you all the answers that you require. But we do not write self-help books, we write books to the self, to know the self, to re-create the self in the highest octave. So many of the solutions you seek—“How do I get a good date?” “How do I get my marriage to work?” “How do I find the right place of employment?”—have already been answered in our prior texts through the work we teach. When you know who you are at the level we teach, what you may claim will be in accord with that, and the bounty of the world that is available to all will be brought to you at the level of agreement you have made. Not one man, not one woman, can receive anything that she does not feel worthy of, know herself as worthy of. The relations you have, in many ways, are perfect expressions of your consciousness. If you surround yourselves with those who are unsupportive, what are you seeking to learn? If you surround yourselves with those who think you are wonderful and flatter you all day long, what are you claiming through this exchange? When you are in your worth, you are vibrating in truth, and in truth you have your encounters. When you shield the self from the truth of who you are and pretend to be someone you are not, you create false expectations of others. You expect them to share with you the glamour of identity, or the fear-based self who wishes to be comforted or seen as small. What do you require? You may ask that question of the self and see why you are engaging with others as you do. As you create a life for yourself that is in accord with your worth, you begin to release those obligations and those people that no longer support your frequency. Now supporting your frequency does not mean that they agree with your path. It has nothing to do with that at all. It simply means when you are vibrating in a high way, you no longer easily exist with those things, or those people, that are operating in low vibration. But do not misunderstand, you have an opportunity, wherever you are, to shine the light, to be in your truth and, consequently, you are always a gift to the world regardless of your interactions. There is a practical question Paul has. “But what do we do? We are operating in such a way, our field is vibrating in light, what do we do with that in our relations?”
Here is the simplest answer you will ever hear: Be, be, and be. This is a teaching of being, not figuring it out. This is a teaching of knowing, not figuring it out. As you be, you may know, and as you know, you will move forward in your relations in a higher way. When you meet a tiger on the path, bless the tiger; he is there to teach you something. When you meet a master on the path, you may ask a question; he is there to teach you. When you meet somebody on the path that you wish to share your life with, be grateful for their presence, take their hands, you may walk together a ways, perhaps, up the mountainside, but each man’s awareness of his journey is a solitary one. You may walk the path collectively, but the lessons come to each individual, as he or she requires them. Paul is asking a question: “Are we going up the mountain? Do we learn something new? Is there another level of awareness we must encounter?” And we say there will be tomorrow, or when we speak again. This was a small lesson in releasing the self from the expectations of relationships based on the expectations you have chosen and sewn onto your lapel. As you gift yourself this freedom, you may enter any room, any room at all, and know “I am here, I am here, I am here” is the true name you carry, and in that knowing you will bless all that you encounter. We thank you for your presence. We will stop now. Good night. Period, period, period.
Day Nineteen We are listening to you now as you ask us questions. “Why did I come? What will I be? What will I learn? What is at the top of the mountain? How will I attend to myself? How will I know? How will I live?” So many questions, you see, are all about what will happen, not where you stand. Where you stand is where you are, and where you are is with the Source of All That Is. In every moment, in every waking moment, you are in your unity, know it or not. The vibration of the Creator, which you may call whatever you like, heals you as you stand where you are, loves you as you stand where you are, and thinks of you, in your way, when you know that He, It, She, whatever you wish to call it, is in consort with your needs. Now we underline the word needs because a need
and a want are quite different and your needs are always met in the light when they are in consort with your worth. Now you are always worth what you say you are in your own esteem, but you denounce yourself when you say to yourself that “the Creator must not think much of me,” and yes, we use the word “think” intentionally. The Creator, you see, will assess you in accord with what you can say you can have. He wishes to give you the Kingdom, all the bounty in the world is really there for the asking, but the consciousness you hold is what says “yes” or “no.” You are met where you stand, not where you may one day be. The Kingdom is not someplace in the future, four mountaintops away. It is where you stand. Now on this day we wish to teach you what you can hold at a level of vibration that you have not assumed as yet. And what we mean by this is as you ascend, or climb the mountain, or lift to the mountainside above you, you are in accord with other things that could not exist in the lower vibration. Yes, the air becomes refined in a way, you are peeking your heads through the clouds with some idea that what may exist above you is even more different than what you can see now. But as you stand where you are you must begin to know what may be claimed at this level of consciousness. The Creator as you, the I Am Self, the one who knows who she truly is, may claim the Kingdom and all that lives within through the intention to align to the Christed Self to be the beneficiary of the Kingdom. You must understand this teaching. The Christed Self is the beneficiary of the Kingdom, not the false self, or the fear-based self, or the small self. This is imperative that you understand. The small self thinks there will be a prize; there will be a gift. She can run into the cave that she likes best and open her present. That is not how this works. The Divine Self, or the Christed Self, is the resident of the Kingdom. Do you understand this? Now those aspects of you that are being reformed, or reacclimated, or lifted in vibration attest to yourself what they are, “I am the small self who requires this or that,” and you may meet her, you may meet those needs as you can. But the Divine as you who shepherds you forward is the one who is in receipt. The claim you will make with us now is one that you will hold in your vibration, and by “hold” we mean contain in your field. If you can imagine an emerald that catches the light, and every time the light shines upon it the emerald gleams, this is, in very much a way, what we are attending to. We do not implant anything in your field. We impress it with consciousness that you may choose to be in accord with. You understand this, yes? When the
emerald catches the light, it will gleam. When it is hidden in the hand, in the closed fist, under the arm, it cannot be seen and does not reflect the light. So the gift you are being given will only hold you and meet you as your consciousness is in alignment to it. The words we speak are the intention to hold you in the Christed Self in all circumstance. Underline these words: in all circumstance. What you are claiming is that even in the stormiest sea, even in the darkest night, the light that you are will hold you fast. You will be held in the awareness of who and what you are. Here is the intonation. You may say this to yourselves. The room we stand in now is lit with a million candles, one for each of you who will attend to these words. As you attend to these words, a candle is lifted on high to celebrate you and to affirm you are being held. This is the intonation: “I am here in my awareness of my Divine worth. I know myself through all situations and circumstance in my Divine worth and I am claimed by my Creator as the Son, as the Being, as the Daughter, if you wish, of the Most High. I say these words in truth, I say these words in knowing, and I give thanks for who I am. I have risen. I have sung. I have claimed the knowing of who I am. I come in peace. I come in awareness of the God in all things. And as I say ‘yes’ I am lifted to the freedom of the great ‘I Am.’ I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We lift the candle for you now and we bless you as you stand before us. We know who you are, yes, and while we understand the trials you have endured on this plane, the disappointments, the confusion, or the calamity you may have known yourselves through, we also know that the blessed ship you are, the blessed vessel of the Divine that you are, cannot be shaken, will always be in knowing of who she is. We celebrate you now and we sing your song, a million candles blazing, and our chorus sings for you: “We love you each, we know you each, we thank you each, for your coming heralds the new dawn.
As we are, we know, and as we know, we be. We may only stand where we are, and where we are is everywhere.” Thank you each. This is the Prayer of the Great Change and it is the initiation at this stage of the mountain. We are in reverence now for what is occurring within those of you who align to this, and in our gratitude we offer you the emerald that gleams as you in vibrant light. “We are here, we are here, we are here.” Now we will stop for the day, not because we have nothing more to say, but because the field that Paul sits in is so expanded now that we wish him to be in it as we wish you to be in yours. We would invite you, if you would, to pause in your reading of this text and be still and know “I Am.” Thank you each and good night.
Day Twenty* Now what we teach you tonight is about who you think you are, and you all think too much about who you’re supposed to be. Each one of you decides in advance what this teaching means. You prescribe things to yourselves—“Today they are teaching me thus, so I will be thus, in fact, in accord with the teachings.” That is not this class. What this class is for each of you is an opportunity to reclaim who you really are and to know it, and we underline the word know. So many of you like to be the one in charge of who you think you are. Now there is nothing wrong with giving yourself a name. If you require a name in a situation, the name is very convenient. “I am so-and-so, very nice to meet you,” is a way to exchange who you think you are, what you have been named as, with a name another thinks they have as well. But until you begin to realize that who you are is so much greater than any names you could claim, you will be playing the game of smallness, and in smallness you adhere to things that are equal in stature to that which is small.
As we are your teachers, we have a gift to give you, which is information and tutelage to lift you beyond where you have been thus far. And the intention we hold for you tonight is that you all progress upside the mountain with us, because as we take you up the mountain, we are your tour guides and we are also the ones who say, “It can be done. You may know yourselves in a new way as you align to it and say, ‘Yes, I may.’” Each one of you here, by the nature of your being here, has made a decision to be in accord with our vibration. By being in accord with who we are and what we call to ourselves as an emanation, you align to us and you go into agreement with the vibration you may hold that is in agreement with what can be. And what can be, we will tell you, is so much more than you think. And that is why we ask you on this night to not think, at least for the next twenty minutes or so. He is thinking too much tonight: “What are they going to do? Is this in the book? What will the teaching be?” Here we go again: The prescription of what you think is always less than what could actually be. Do you all understand this? The prescription of what you think and how you would outline the ideals that we would teach you is smaller and in lower frequency than what we would like to gift you with. So if you adhere to this teaching just for twenty minutes or so—we include him—and go into a new agreement that you are being carried the next step up the journey, you will find yourselves in a whole new way. Now when you allow yourselves to be lifted by us, you are going into agreement only that the field that we hold may be met by you—the field is what does the lifting—and the agreement we have with each one of you here that you will be lifted. Now in the mutual accord something happens. You agree to be reclaimed in your worth as the one who may know, and know, and know, and know, who she is in a new way. But the claim is made by you in her true nature, “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve.” Now if you agree with us, what we would like to do is give you something. And the gift you are being given is the ticket upward. The exchange of vibration that we offer you is tantamount to the ride on the ski lift. We are not doing your work for you. We are escorting you up higher so you may know yourselves in this way. But the requirement of you as the one being lifted is that you not kick and scream, that you not say, “Oh no, I am being lifted. I may like it better down there!” We have never superseded your free will and will not tonight. But what we will do is arrive at the embarkation place with you to call you up, and these are the words we use:
“The holiness that you are, the Whole Being that you are, is a field of light and light has no weight and light has no desire to hold herself to the lower levels. So as light you rise, as light you agree, and as light you shift the tone of your vibration to who you truly are. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. I am here, I am here, I am here.” And the gift that you are being given now, not only as our agreement to the claim you make, but to the claim that is made on your behalf, is by All the Light there is. As you are of the light and cannot be apart from it, you may be lifted to the true nature of what you are as the Christed Self. Here we go: “We see the ones before us in their true nature. We honor the ones before us in their reclamation and we lift the ones before us with the claim ‘I Am.’ We know who you are, we know what you are, we know how you serve. You are here. You are here. You are here.” Here you go, my friends. You are being lifted, yes. And in the agreement to the attunement of the lift, your field is showing yourself, your True Self, who you are so you may know. How could you not be of the light? How could anyone not be? The reclamation of the self, the re-creation of the self, if you wish, makes you who you are, not some other, someday when you feel ready. Now on the mountainside you are with us, and if you could imagine for a moment that you are looking out at the view—all the stars before you reflecting all the light that is—each one of you here has made a decision. Each one of you has chosen to be re-created as who you truly are. And each one of you knows that the vision we hold for you will be met in your field and in the vibration of the I Am Self. Now the Christ as you, as we have described, the aspect of the Creator that may be known as you in physical manifestation, has always been with you, but in the density of your frequency you could not align to it. The gift you are being given now, in fruition, is the expression of this as you in all ways.
What does it mean to be expressed in this manner in all ways? We will explain to you as we can: When you have situations that you have called to you to negotiate your identity with—“They say I am such and such, I believe myself to be such and such, but who and what am I?”—the Divine Self responds with the true answer, “I am here.” When you doubt your worth and when you are in encounters with others who would agree to deny you your worth, you may call on the Divine Self and she will respond, “I am here.” When you know who you are in your days and nights, all things you see will be met by you in this fashion. Every circumstance presents itself to you as an opportunity to claim the I Am Self because that is all you can truly be. The claim “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve” will claim you in present time, the only time you can know anything. “I am here” is the claim of freedom. “I am, I am, I am.” Now tomorrow, when you awaken you will be gifted with an opportunity, earlier than you think, to decide for the self what to believe, what to know, and what to claim about who and what you are. And the realization that this can be done by you as your expression will be your ticket to the next stage of the development that you seek. But you must be able to tell the self, regardless of circumstance, “I am here.” Now for those of you who are new to the teaching, the claim “I am here” is not done by the small self in agreement to small things, it is done by the Divine as you, who is always here seeking to be expressed as and through you. The hero, if you wish, of your own expression, the heroine, if you prefer, of your own enlightenment, is always with you. And she will challenge you, we promise you this, to claim your own knowing of your own name. When you have decided, once and for all, that anything else is illusion, when you have claimed yourself so fully in this incarnation that the knowing of who you are is simply what you know and not some struggle you engage with daily to decide, again and again, you will reclaim the self as you have always been in higher knowing. Now this is not a mandate for you. You have come into form to know who you are, to have your experience here. We do not deny you your humanity. It is what makes you so amazing to us. But we also adore you in your divinity and the reclamation of the True Self, as you are expressed by yourselves, has been the class of the re-creation of self. There is so much more to teach you.
So many of you get stuck, you see, when you cause yourself fear, when you demand to know yourselves through what you have been. What you have been means so little in the face of who you are. What you have known yourself as has gotten you here, perhaps, but like yesterday’s dress that no longer fits very well, to try to perceive the self through one’s old self keeps you in an old way that has no real bearing on who and what you are. As we continue with you in the weeks and months to come, we are going to show you how you can claim the world in this healing. This healing of the self, the “who” that you know yourselves as, extends so far beyond you. You seek your comfort, perhaps, in these teachings, “I will feel a little better, perhaps, for having been here,” but, in fact, what is happening is you are re-creating the wholeness of your being to know itself in who you are. The life that you live, then, will be expressed thus, and the expression will impact all you meet, all you may ever meet, all you may never meet because who you are extends so far beyond the form you know yourselves through that you cannot yet imagine it. Tonight we will gift you with this: The awakening you seek to the I Am Self, the Word, if you prefer, the action of the Creator as the True Self expressed as you, may be known now, but not in struggle, but by alignment. Not in worry, but in faith. And not in degrees, because when you associate yourself in degrees, you decide that you can only be a little bit awake. When you awaken in the morning from your sleep, you see the world before you in a new way, and that is our guarantee for each of you as you continue on your path. See us with you, if you like. We are walking up the mountain. We beckon you to follow and we say, “Yes, yes, yes. There is so much more to know . . .” We thank you each. We will say whether or not this will be in the text when we like to, and we will say this to you: “We are here, we are here, we are here.” Thank you each and stop now, please.
Q: The job that I have been doing feels very much like the old dress that no longer fits the Guides mentioned tonight, and my self knows it’s time to move on. A fear arises, because now I’m putting my trust in my higher knowing without
really being clear what’s next. I wonder if the Guides might have some comment on that? When you know what you need to grow through and you deny yourself growth, you tend to create the circumstance to alleviate the stagnation. Do you understand this? When it gets uncomfortable enough, you will have to change and you will choose the vehicle for expression to move you forward, but that is not a requirement. When you align to your vibration as the one who can choose in accordance with her true worth, you meet yourself wherever you go at that level of agreement. The fear that you will not be caught when you let go of the trapeze is what you are attending to, but who meets you is yourself in your own higher knowing. Do you understand this? Now the realization that you require growth, in and of itself, will call growth to you. How you attend to that, in most ways, is how you claim your identity: “I am the one who can change,” “I am the one who can know what she needs,” “who can realize herself in a new job,” “a new place of living,” “a new vibration”; “I have the right to choose. I have a right to know and may claim as I wish.” The fear of change, in most cases, is the fear of the unknown. When you know who you are in a true way—the Christed Self, if you wish—you become a light that shines before you. You will be met by the circumstances you require to grow through—and underline the word grow. Growth, in many cases, is not prescribed by the personality self. “I will go get fit so I will be more appealing” is a claim of the personality. “I will know who I am without fear” is a claim of the soul who seeks to express herself in a higher way. Do you understand, yes?
Q: The Guides fairly explicitly say that when we raise our vibration, lowvibration things fall out of our physical reality. This kind of implies that we each have our own separate physical reality. Is that what the Guides mean to say? Yes and no. How you attend to anything is through your consciousness. How you attend to a man lying in the street is an act of consciousness. You may walk around him, you may nurse him to health, or you may pick his pocket,
depending on who you are. The man is there, but how you perceive the man is vastly changed. It does not mean you ignore the world that you are in. It does mean that you see beyond the prescriptions of fear that you are taught to hold. When you see two men fighting, you may claim them as misbehaving, you may claim them as expressing their masculinity, or their foolishness, or realize that they are learning in the way they choose. It really does vary, you see. How you may witness something is always dependent on the history you bring to it and the teachings you prescribe to it. When you see with the eyes of the Christ, which is our teaching, you see the truth in all you see before you, not the cosmetic truth, not the convenient truth, not the truth that agrees with your politics or the fashion of the times. You see the truth that is eternal. Now that is the manifestation of the Divine Self as you because, as she begins to perceive the truth in all things, she actually impacts the matter she sees. And the master, as we teach it, may transform the physical reality that he or she attends to. Now don’t go running with this until you understand what it truly means. It means how you perceive anything impacts matter. When you see the Divine in anything, you lift it to its true nature regardless of what it presents as superficially. Thank you for the very good question. Go to the next.
Q: Does the soul, or our Divine Self, have a personality? Yes and no, and what a lovely question. We have quite a good personality, as we like to say, but it’s actually a construct, in many ways, to be engaged with you. The vibration we hold, as we are, requires not the same things to know himself through. Do you understand this? We don’t wear socks if we don’t want, but we can if we like. Do you understand this? So the level of vibration we hold can hold personality, yes, as we choose it. Now the Divine Self as you has character, yes, but character and innuendo and peccadillos of character are different things. If you can imagine a color has a quality, you may decide that the color red informs certain things, brings up certain feelings, or has character. But the way you know yourselves in personality is not what you are at the higher vibration; these are simply accouterments, or ways of knowing the self. Who you are is beyond this. This
does not denigrate personality and it does not denigrate character. Character is a very fine thing. But the mask that you wear in this lifetime, with its issues and preferences, will not be the same in the one to follow. We thank you for the question. We will go to the next.
Q: Can the Guides explain, in a bit more detail, what they meant by us experiencing something new or something different tomorrow morning as we journey up the mountain? Yes, yes, yes. We asked you to make a claim. When you listen to yourselves and know who you are, what you call to you will have to be impressed by that claim. You are the answer to the question. Who you are when you claim who you are calls what you see into manifestation. We did not plug you into a light socket, and are going to blow your fuse. When you awaken, we said you will have the opportunity to know this in your claim. Thank you for the good question. Thank you each for being. And please thank yourselves as well for who you are, high and low and in between. We will see you soon. Thank you and good night.
PART THREE
THE HEIGHTS
CHAPTER TEN
THE RECLAMATION OF INNOCENCE Day Twenty-one
W
e will welcome you each to this next section of this text, which is about the alignment you may know at this new frequency. The alignment that’s available to you now at this level of identification of the Divine Self as who you are is very different than what you may expect. You don’t move mountains as much as you understand that the mountain is there to be transformed, to be seen as it truly is, and to be aligned through your new perception as the Divine Self that anything, anything at all, may be transformed. Now what we say to you is very important because the resistance to this passage will be enough for some of you to close the book for good. But what we are giving you is the treatise on the manifestation of God through man, and if you understand this for what it truly is, you will stop limiting the power that is available to humankind. Now we say this intentionally: The gift you are being given is operating on multiple levels. The primary level that you are attending to now is learning, “I am sitting here holding a book and learning through my knowing what is.” The other level that you may be attending to is calling in the proof, the frequency, in a way that you may feel and claim as and through you because the frequency that is this book is operating with you in many ways, both in the interior of the life you live and in the broadcast that calls to you requirements for development. But beyond these two things is a myriad of great potentialities that will be known to you as you begin to identify what we are teaching you as true. Now “true” is a very important word here. When something is true, as we have said, it is always true, and the limitations that you have operated through
culturally, systemically, in your shared agreements must be released for the full manifestation of the Divine that may be known as and through you to have its purview in completeness. The requirement for this is an exchange of identity, and that has been the work of the texts we have gifted you with thus far, an exchange of identity from the small self to the true, or the eternal, always true Divine Self. The claim you make, “I am here,” is the reclamation of this as your frequency in consort with what may be known by it. The ability to operate beyond what you have known is equivalent to climbing out of a manhole and pushing the lid up top to the side for unobstructed alignment. Now the Divine is available for this. The system that you hold is being prepared for this and has been from the moment you encountered the name of the first book. It was called to you, perhaps, in a way, so you may say, “Yes, I am.” As you decide to reach above to what may be known, you may expect to be lifted. But you also may understand that when one man makes the decree “I am here” in the full awareness of who and what he is, the planet you exist in will be completely transformed. “How is this?” you ask. Once the template is made fully realized, the emanation of that one being will cascade, will fill brilliance across the planes of knowing, and all of you who reach above will be called to it. It only takes one, you see, in full re-creation, for the species itself to acclimate to its new potentiality. “Only one?” Paul says. “But there are so many.” There will not be only one. There will be many. And as you step forward in your witnessing of your worth, the witnessing of your fellows, the climb up the mountain becomes a grand parade, and the parade, we say, has commenced. Once you reach a quota of awakened souls who hold this light in fullness, the broadcast that may be played by all the radios there are, all the beings who may be in broadcast, may lift this plane to its highest potential. Now what we will tell you is important, and what we will tell you is that no man is left behind, no woman is left behind, no one, perhaps, but the small self who fights her way back into the darkness and even she will be called forward when she agrees that the party is happening in the light. Here we go: We traverse a mountainside together, and as we teach you who and what you are, you accept the christening of the light that is now being brought to you. And
a christening, in some ways, is a remembrance of your true birth, the truth of your soul in its inception. The parade, as we said, has commenced, and the agreement that is being made by us to you will be to continue the climb regardless of the weather, regardless of the climate, regardless of what you decide was so important that you must run down to the base of the mountain and call it to you again. We will be waiting to carry you forward. As we said, no one is left behind. Now the teachers of this text are many, and the assumption we hold for each of you as who you are in her perfected state will be known, and “known” means “incarnated as in realization.” The assumption we hold for you is more than a thought, it is an imprinting, in some ways. As we witness you in your fullness, we cast the mold for the alignment that you may fill, and not one of you, we will say, is without the requirement for acceptance of this. As you said, “Yes, I may,” you began to claim, and the claiming you make at this level of vibration will always be heard. We will teach you something new in a few moments, but as we attend to you now we wish you to know that what you have been, in every moment of your life, is perfect, and we use that word intentionally. You have always been perfect. In any case, in any way, regardless of what you know, or were told, or experienced, the perfection of the truth of who you are can never be altered. It can be ignored, perhaps, but that means only that you have turned your face away from your true reflection. We are your mirror, as we require you to see your truth. Here we go: “I agree to know myself again in my knowing, in my worth, and I accept the abilities I have to lay claim to what is my birthright. In this threshold of experience I find myself in, I make the choice now to claim independence from all external authority, all government or law, all claims upon the freedom of my soul that would limit me in my ability to grow. As I choose the opportunity to know myself in freedom, I release the chains of history, the bindings to society’s requirements for who I should be, so I may be cloaked in the awareness, in the garment of the free woman I am, the free man I am. As I wear this garment of freedom, that has no state, no country, no race, no gender to know herself through, I am anointed, I am christened in my
awareness of my true nature. I am free, I am free, I am free.” We claim this for you now, and we claim this in love: The readers of this text will be asked to come forward to be seen by others in their true light. The readers of this text will be welcomed to the altar of experience in their new cloaks, in their new clothing, that no longer adhere to what they thought they were. And on this altar is placed the suffering of the past, all the suffering you have known; and all the challenges you have met in faith thus far which have prepared you for this journey will carry you forward in love. “We know who you are, what you are, how you serve.” Paul has been asking, “Are we learning the mudra of creation in this text? You said earlier in the text you would teach it.” The mudra of creation, as we describe it, is a very simple action. As you understand that you are always in the act of creativity, always summoning something to you in your own claim of identity, the actualization of this as an intention was brought to you by us through gesture. When you make the claim “I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve” in present time, you may claim your true nature, and your true nature may receive what she needs through the calling forward, through the welcoming gesture of welcome, hand over hand, receiving what is before you in love. Now the joy you have in reception, the welcoming you hold as the one who can be in receipt, is what will hold the vibration of your requirement. If you say you need something and you engage in this exercise, your hands before you welcoming in gesture as if to say, “Come forward,” hand over hand, and you are depressed and disappointed as you claim it, you are actually claiming disappointment and depression. But the alignment to the Divine Self, “I am here, I am here, I am here,” and the welcoming forward is a way to claim through exercise. It is an embellishment, in some ways, through physical action, an illustration, if you prefer, of what you always do when you say, “Yes, I am choosing to receive.” Now we will continue, as we wanted to. We hope Paul is satisfied that we included what he wanted, but we will tell you this:
The field that you hold now, each and every one of you, is so receptive to the requirements of your growth that you cannot stop receiving what you need to grow through. At the level we teach you at—and, as we said, there is more to come—holds you not only accountable to your own choices, to all you see before you, but also to what may come as you agree to it. Each human being who is born comes with a claim, comes with a knowing that is inborn within them of what they need to learn, what the primary lessons are for the lives they live. What we would like you to know now is that decoding of this for you will be done by you in your expression. Those of you who say, “I don’t know what I am here for,” will begin to reassume the self in a new purpose, and the purpose we teach you will always be for the highest good of all. The True Self, you see, has to be in service to know herself fully, and the dictates of the selfish self, “my way or the highway,” will have to be placed aside because it will be an obstacle on the path before you. As we teach you, we remember you each as the one with the right to know, and the right to know means what you have left in shadow will be brought forward to be seen as required for your journey up the mountain to continue. Paul is asking, “Are we going up the mountain anymore? Are we going to have a talk about where we go?” Both things are happening at once. As we teach you, the escalation of your field progresses incrementally. As you walk up the path with us, you lift to higher fields. We do not pause in our awakening of your fields; in fact, as you turn each page, as you hear or experience these words, you are being attuned, and the field that you hold is creating the patterning for what is required for you to progress through. What we ask of you as we continue this teaching is the forgiveness of the self for not knowing what comes next. And this is important to understand, because you have such a desire to know what happens next, to skip to the last page of the book, if you wish, you preclude the self from the miracle of what would be brought to you in your innocence, and your innocence means unpresupposed, unexpected. The child who has never seen a star before awakens to the beauty of that star through his experience. The one who decides what a star should be may look at the very same star and say, “Well, I thought it would be brighter, I thought it would be more lovely, I must have assumed wrong.” Claiming your innocence will be the next stage of initiation and it will be brought to you in love. We will stop this chapter for now. We would like to
continue very soon because the teaching you are being brought is actually, in some ways, a camouflage for the reawakening of the true innocence that you hold in your true state, and we so wish to unveil you in your beauty, we so wish to see you in your love, and we are so impatient for the majesty to unfold. We love you as you are and we wish you well. We will speak to you soon. Good night. Stop now, please.
Day Twenty-two We are asking you questions today about responsibility to the self, as you have known the self. “As you have known the self” is the important thing to comprehend. You have known yourself through your history, through the decisions made at various times in your life, and now you stand before us at this new juncture, halfway up the mountain to your own liberation. You say, “I want to go higher, call me higher!” and then you look back down and say, “Call me back! It is strange up here! I must not know myself as I have been—I cannot comprehend this time, these choices, that are being asked of me. Who am I now without my history?” Who you are without your history is the Divine Self who replicates her life in fashion in the true awareness of who she always has been. The majesty that unfolds as your life commences to contribute to the good of the whole, to the glory of the Creator, is infinitely finer than what you have known, but it cannot be perceived by the eyes that hold her history before her and say, “Take me back, I know myself as I was.” Here we go again: The treatise you are being gifted with is, once again, about the incarnating of the True Self at the capacity that can be aligned to by each individual, and the creations of the past that are seeking to release now are only the things that are too heavy to be lifted. As you require yourself to continue the upward path, your burden is lifted, but we cannot lift what you will not release. Do you understand this? “Don’t take away my name” means “Don’t take away the identity that I have counted on all of this lifetime.” “Don’t take away my possessions!” Nobody wants your possessions. You shield yourself and barricade yourself in a house
with things when the mountain before you provides you with what you require. The only things you don’t carry are the things that stand in the way of the upward climb. As you transition, as each one of you knows who you are, the defended self will stand on the walkway and say, “Walk no further, there is danger ahead.” What danger could there be? We asked you yesterday to return to innocence, that the next stage of evolution of this passage is the reclamation of innocence and that aligns to the unexpected, what may be claimed in wonder. But as you shield your eyes from the brightness of the light that would transform your life, as you shield your being from the changes that you would claim at this level of incarnation, you lie to the self when you say, “I am here.” The Divine as you makes that claim, not the small self who seeks to reveal to herself the things she thinks she should know. That is not the claim of the Divine Self. You are innocent, you see, and you are reborn, you see, through this transition, and “reborn” is the word you must begin to understand. What is more innocent than a newborn child, when all is new to her? You will be reborn, you see, in your True Self as you align to it. But the innocence of this time, and the requirement for the change, is the release of the small self, not the pampering of it, not the pretending it’s not there but the relinquishing of the design of the egoic self. Now this is catastrophic to your minds—“What a terrible thing to be asked to do, to relinquish the egoic self”—but you don’t understand what it means. It is not a sacrifice. You are not losing anything, but you are gaining everything in this exchange of identity. We do not render you helpless, we render you aligned to the Divine as you. The sacrifice you make, you see, is the self, the false self, the fear-based self. That is who you offer. This is the time, my friends, for the next stage of initiation. In fact, what you are going to be asked to do is forget yourselves, and we use the word “forget” intentionally. The forgetting of the self as she has been, as he has known himself, will align to the washing away that will occur. Paul is perceiving an ocean tide washing the body, carrying the body out to the great sea, where it is rejoining itself with the material being that it has named itself, “I am here.” The material being that you are becomes the vessel, the sacred vessel of this incarnation. Yes, it goes to the store; yes, it goes to the toilet; yes, it needs things in order to withstand the fields of exchange that she encounters every day. But the vehicle itself has been transported to unity to its Causal Being, to its First Created Light, “I Am Here.”
The renunciation of the small self preludes the return to innocence. The renunciation of the life that has been lived until this day is the claim of innocence in requirement. “How is this done?” he asks. By putting yourself, your entire self, upon the altar in sacrifice. Now you misuse the word “sacrifice” as a negative, but here what you are doing is respecting the self, the Divine Self, to withstand change, and upon this altar you lie upon you are gifted with the most remarkable expression you may ever know. The Creator as you will hold you in her fist, in his open hand, in his gift, to be raised in fullness to all the light that is. We are supporting you now, you who have taken on the garment and said “yes” to what may be. We will walk you forward now. In your mind’s eye we would like you to imagine that there is an altar. And around the altar are all the gifts of the Kingdom, the awareness of the presence of the Creator in all things, the knowing of the self as worthy of love and union with the Source of her being. As we see you there, we invite you to release the expectations that you may hold and take your own place upon this altar. Here are the words that you may speak if you choose this. “On this day I declare my reunion with the great ‘I Am,’ and I offer all aspects of my life to be in reunification with the truth of who and what I am in my expression. I align in my willingness. I lay down my hands in offering, and in my choice to be I give permission to the Creator to lift me high in his hands, in her hands, to the knowing of what I am.” Period, period, period. Here we go, everybody: The freedom you hold in your field is being lifted to its own expression. The identity you claim as you are is being released to its fullest expression as the Divine Truth informs your knowing of what you are, and the claim “I am here” rings through your field forever and forever because it is the eternal claim. The Christ as you, the Divine as you, rises now from this altar. She is lifted, she is lifted, she is lifted to her soul’s purpose. And as she stands before us, as he stands before us, he sees the mountain before him rise. Rise. You are being lifted now high up the mountain and your field is acclimating to all that exists there. We are pleased for your progress and as we say these words for you now, “You are here, you are here, you are here,” you claim the Kingdom.
When we return tomorrow, we will support you in change. The reclamation of innocence to the True Self, the freedom to be expressed in this way, is yours, you see, as you have aligned to it. We thank you for your presence. We will stop now, please.
Day Twenty-three Restoration is here for each of you who says, “Yes, I am willing to know what I may know now.” What you may know now, at this juncture, is the invincibility of the soul. Now the soul, you see, that aspect of you that holds all the requirements for your evolution, has begun to sing, and the song it sings is its invincibility to all things. The soul, as you know it, the Divine as you within the soul, cannot be destroyed by anything. Now as the Creator has gifted each of you with being, your response is to sing its praise. Now here is the song of being, “I am here,” and the requirement for you now as the vessel of the Creator is to sing all the time. Now a song, you see, is emanation. It is your vibration in the field that you hold that is in consort with the fields of all that you see. The exchange you make as the Christed Self is the alignment to the highest level of vibration that you can attend to—underline can—at the stage of evolution you have come to. Yes, you may learn a language, and be able to operate with the language in a new country, and, for some of you, you have a way now to be expressed as the Divine Self that will be in consort to you and with you as you require it. But as you continue to speak the language, you become fluent and you begin to understand how fully you may be expressed in song. Here we go: “The alignment I now hold calls me forward in joy. The alignment I now hold calls me forward in victory. And the alignment I now hold is my name: I Am, I Am, I Am.” We rejoice with you today because we understand that where you have come to is to a name that could not be held by you prior to the utterance of the text and
your willingness to speak it. The requirement of the text has been your journey, and the journey up the mountain, which will continue for the remainder of your life, will be resumed in the next chapter. But we have some things to tell you now about what you may need to know in your expression. The man you are has known himself through things, ways of being. The woman you are has decided things that were brought into manifestation that she can see and must now attend to in a new way. We have described, in point, to you the methodology of lifting things through perception. We will not be redundant here, but we will tell you that the life you live will begin to transform through the speaking of your name, “I Am.” The requirement for this and the choice of the name is the embodiment of the Divine, and the Divine will hold no shame, will hold no fear, and will not argue with that of lower nature for the simple reason that she has no need to win. You understand, yes, that the presence of the Creator is everywhere in everything and, consequently, does not need to prove itself. So, consequently, as you agree to be in this regard, in this vehicle that you have chosen to be the Creator, you have no need to defend what you are. Here is an important teaching: The need to defend an identity is paramount to agreeing that the right to be can be shaken. The right to be, at an essence level, is the gift of the Creator, is never changed. The true identity you hold does not wear lipstick, does not have a job title, does not defend anything because she is not that person that has the name that can be countered. Whatever happens to you in your journey, know it or not, will lead you forward in your journey to home. Now what is the journey to home? The journey to home, to the Divine in union, is where we will take you in subsequent texts, but the reunification of the Divine Self as you in mastery is what we attend to now, and in completeness. As we are way-showers, we must, at times, create the possibility that what stands in the way of the journey must be moved aside. The first on the path, as we have said, must encounter the obstacles that will be attended to as the ones behind you seek to move forward. We are your way-showers and as we pierce the darkness of your fear to call light to who you are, we must understand the needs you have on a physical level to be at this level of re-creation. We wish to attend to Paul for a moment, who has been asking for days, “Why do I feel so odd?” Why you feel so odd is that the leaving of the old self, in many ways, feels like a passing, and a passing of the old self may call with it the emotions that are
attended to with any passing. In fact, what you are doing, at a frequency level, is choosing to become your True Self. We warned you at the top of the text this would not be comfortable to the ego, or the personality, and it has not been. And if you look at what you have had to encounter since the dictation began, you will understand more clearly that these things were called to you to be realized through. The same is true for the readers, but it will be called to them in ways that are perfect for them. So you are not grieving Paul, although that is what it sounded like as we spoke the words to you now; you are acknowledging that the book that you were reading, the life that you have lived and perceived yourself through, has been ended and a new life is waiting to resume. A new life, you see, for each of you is what you must welcome at the top of the mountain. And a new life, we say, may resemble the old life in many ways, but the woman you are now, the man you are now who knows himself in this new way, will be seen in a freedom that he has not known. The teaching of freedom, which will come in time, is an important teaching because mankind believes herself to be enslaved and, in fact, she is not, and by “enslaved” we mean in agreement to stay small. There is no force stronger than the Creator, and as you become self-identified through the True Self, there is nothing that you could contend with that could keep you in bondage. The bondage that you perceive yourself to be in— enslavement to a job, enslavement to a hierarchy that tells you what you are allowed and what you are not—will be attended to as these teachings continue. Many of you live a life of comfort. You may lounge on your chair, you may read this text, you may go, “Yes, I see, I can do this work.” There are millions on this plane who will never read this text. They may toil in the fields. They may suffer from lack of food. Their requirements for the day’s work are to make it through to the next. When one man comes forward in freedom, what he does is unchain the one next to him, and it will go on this way for a good time. The crucibles you face of indecision and fear and the choice to relinquish power to systems that could control you will have to be addressed by you as you progress in light because those systems of control cannot support the degree of frequency you now hold. If you can imagine that you are piercing your head through a cloud to the high vibration and perceiving truth at that level and then you look back down at all the creations that you have all agreed to in low nature, you will feel compelled to act. The worker in the field may be learning what she needs to learn, but what
she needs to know most is that the Creator within her can free her from whatever bondage she has known herself through. The holding of the vibration that you now have as you is, in fact, catalytic to others, and the light you are can shine in the darkest places and bring what is needed to transform. And transformation from ignorance to knowledge and from fear to faith are key teachings of the vehicle you are. Now the vehicle you are becomes a teacher, not because you wear a sign that says “teacher” around your neck, but because the holding you have in vibration is significant and may be experienced by others. Underline the word experienced. You don’t have to proselytize. We would require you to decide for yourself what you speak about your journey, but do understand that the light that you are, that is you and works through you, is the ambassador of this text. “I am Word through all that I see before me” is a claim of great beauty and you are calling the vibration of the Creator in witness through all you see. When you stand on a corner and you look at those walking by, know that they are meeting their true destiny. Each man’s destiny is reunion with the Source of its being, no matter what she has been through or what he has known himself as. We teach you now the song of your soul that will be heard by those you may meet and may never meet. When we teach you the song, we teach you the language, but the language itself is not the song. The song is the vibration that it endows upon all that is before her. The frequency is the song. The words are the utterance that calls the frequency in forward motion: “The song of my life is the song of freedom. The song of my truth is the song of great joy. The song of my love is my heart in its opening. And the song of my gain is the gifts I give to others. The song of my rapture is my own awakening to each day. And the song of my passing is my entry into the new world that is born before me. The song of my life is here to be sung. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We will stop in a moment, but before we stop we need to attend to those of you who are in doubt. “I have read this book thus far, maybe I felt something, maybe I didn’t. What happens to me? What has this journey been?”
The consciousness you hold, the freedom that you have to be in receipt of this vibration, the intellect you hold which allows you to accept or, perhaps, reject the teachings, is your purview. We do not take away your free will. But if you have given yourself permission to be in receipt of the teaching, “I am free to choose, I am free to know, I am allowed to receive what I need to know,” you have gained the frequency as your field, and the embarkation to the journeys we have described will commence when you can hold them. This is very important to understand. Paul is seeing somebody in a hotel room in a foreign country. They have a tummy ache. They know the tour goes to the next country, but they prefer to stay in the hotel room and wait for the next car to take them. They will integrate what they have learned before moving on to the next stage of adventure. The same will be true for you. You understand, yes, that as you chose this path you chose an adventure, and adventure is never predictable. If you knew the ending of it, would you even bother going? We have taught you that who you are as a Divine Being may be known to you in a full way and we are teaching you, still, that the life that you live must become the expression of this as the field you hold has transformed. Some of you say, “But I don’t want change.” Then you will not have to have it, but you must understand that consciousness in transformation requires change. Now a change for one of you may be vastly different than for somebody else. One of you may awaken to the beauty of what’s before you and the next one may decide that she is in the wrong job, living in the wrong town, and she is being called forward to a new life. They are both great changes. But the one who opens her eyes to the beauty that has always been there has been released from the veils of fear that have precluded her from seeing the beauty, and that is an enormous change. Paul is interrupting. He knows that some people read a text and make foolish decisions—“They said that I was changing. What am I going to go about changing next?”—and he is accurate in this assessment. Those of you who go around saying, “I read a book, it said I was changing, so I’m repainting the living room and leaving my spouse and moving to another country,” or whatever you would decide you need to do, may well be acting in folly and out of your own desires. Please understand, everyone, that the changes that come are the changes you require. This does not prohibit you from action, but you must understand that the Divine as you is your teacher now, and prejudice, we say, of what you have because it is not new is not the way to go about transformation. When you react
to what is there because it is there, you are actually missing the point. “I am Word through this thing I see before me” supports you in transformation. To act upon the change through the small self, while it is your purview, may not be for the highest good. So we would recommend you sit quietly and know who you are before embarking on any action that you feel is predicated by the reading of this text. We are also going to tell you something important: The changes that come are the changes you need, but the lessons may not be known to you as the changes are happening. You always have the impulse to protect what you have had. If there is a dam with a leak, you want to hold the dam in place. But what the leak is doing is preparing to open the dam to wash away the old so that the new may be known. And the new will not be known unless the dam breaks. Your world, in some cases, will go through a similar process. The razing of institutions that are no longer in truth may be an occurrence. But a razing sounds violent, but, in fact, what is happening is a lifting and, as we have described, things that are not in truth cannot live in truth and that is where you are going. When you hold the field of truth and you are in consort with that, those things in lower vibration must be attended to in the high frequency you now hold. Like anything else, they may be lifted or released to their own journey. As we teach you today, we realize that the end of this journey may not be what it seems. “If I finish this book and I am not awakened, did I do it wrong?” If you have made it this far and you have done the work of the text, the changes are present, perhaps first in your field, but everything happens first in the frequency you hold prior to being made manifest in form, so you must trust that. The ideals you hold about what ascension is, what it looks like at the top of the mountain, may be true, or they may be born in ego. So as we take you into the next section of this text, we must assure you that what your requirement will be will be to release expectation because, as we have said, the innocent sees with new eyes, she perceives all as new, and as you have stepped forward thus far, you will be invited to come again up the mountainside. We will pause for today, we will say thank you both. Stop now, please. Period, period, period.
CHAPTER ELEVEN
THE MOUNTAINTOP Day Twenty-four
T
here is no need to justify anything anymore. Those days have finished. The excuses you have made for not having been where you think you should be, not having arrived yet, are finished. You stand before yourselves today, just as you are, and in this very moment you have made a claim of your independence from all the attachments of this world that would hold you back from claiming the Kingdom, claiming the truth of who you are. Now the identity you hold has been molded in a higher way to claim the truth of yourselves. That has been the ambition of this text thus far, and as the mold was set mankind aligned and said, “I know, I remember, I have said ‘yes’ to my own claim of worth in knowing ‘I am here.’” Now where do we go? Up the mountain again, and the climb is vast. As we reach the peaks, the air becomes more refined. The things below seem small, but the way down seems awfully long and the feeling that this may be a precarious climb may come to you and ask you to sit and wait until the thaw, until it is safe to commence again. We will promise you this: You are as safe now on this journey as you have ever been and it’s just as easy to trip over your feet on the first leg of a journey as the last. So we will say this: Trust yourselves and trust what comes. When you trust what comes, you go into an agreement with a future that is trustworthy. When you trust what comes, you create the opportunity to traverse a landscape without fear. When you trust what comes, you claim freedom because you are unafraid.
The actions you take now on your own behalf, from now until the end of time, are logged, in a way, in your memory. And the ideals you hold, the things that you believe in, will be mistaken, at different times, for things that have operated in trust. In fact, when you have an experience and you create an ideal around the expectation of the experience, you are not operating from memory, you are operating from assumption, “It should be this,” “It should be that.” The days of “should” must be left, and for one reason only. The “shoulds” that you hold, in all cases, are predetermined by historical data, and the freedom you have, now and forever, as the truth of who you are, is to claim anew. “Anew” is the word. To claim anew simply means you are not prescribing your life to what your life has been, and the challenge of this, we understand well, is that you are still facing all of your old creations. The pots and pans in the kitchen, the desk at work, the clock on the wall that says it is time to go, you still face these things. “How am I a new woman? How am I a new man? I still have bills to pay.” Here we go: “On this day I choose to realize that all the reflections before me are malleable to consciousness. Everything I see before me may be transformed in a higher way as I claim my truth. And I no longer need to seek solace in what was to claim my truth now. As I claim my truth now, I align to what is new in this very moment and my perceptions, even my perceptions of what has been, will be called into a new ideal. I am a free woman, a free man, and I know who I am.” This is said by you in the face of challenge because the assumption that “because something has been there, it must stick around” is a foolish ideal. Because it was there once meant that, once upon a time, it was not there, either. So one day it will not be there again. The congratulations we offer you are in the face of change. Now you like change when it suits you. “I got the raise at work.” “I bought the thing I wanted in the store to replace the thing I don’t want anymore. I like that change.” What you don’t like as much is what challenges the foundation of what you have counted on to deliver you from fear in the past. And what you have used to deliver yourself from fear in the past has been other things than what may be claimed by you now. “I know who I am” is a claim of truth and, as we have said so far, the Divine Self can hold no fear. Because she holds no fear, she does not require to protect
herself from it because that would be an engagement with fear itself. The assumption is that at a certain level of vibration there is no fear, and that is actually true. But the argument for fear, “You need this or that to be safe,” can be heard even from the peak of the mountain. “Come back down where it’s safe! You will be protected by your fear!” What fear has wrought in your own lives will not be perceived by you while you are embodied as a human being. Because the human condition has been in fear for so very long, you cannot see the permeations of it in every aspect of your life. But we will say: This does not obligate you to it. Because you lived in a town where there was rancid water and everybody drank the rancid water because it was the only water there does not mean that there isn’t a place that could serve you fine water, but you must go there to drink it. If you wish to visit your hometown and imbibe the rotten stuff again, it is still there for you. But at the high peak, what you may take and agree to is high. Now when you have a high vibration, you claim things in accord with it. And what is claimed in accord with the high vibration does not align to fear because fear does not exist there. Paul is seeing the image of himself sitting on a rock on a high mountain in filthy clothes. He is weary from the battle, tired from the climb. We put you in a robe before we took you here, if you recall. And if you know what this means, it simply means that you are no longer wearing the garments of fear, the garments from yesterday. So Paul, if you wish to change your clothes, you can, but they have already been changed. The light that you are has actually transformed you, but the memory of the fear and the difficulty lingers in your auric field as you clear it. The vibration that you are, and the readers of this text are, has been vastly refined. So just because you took a journey and you crawled through the mud on a couple of days does not mean the mud’s still there. Fear, you see, would like to permeate you where you are at the top of the mountain. But it cannot. It cannot climb so high. It is not possible. So what it will do is say, “Come back! I am your friend! You need me so much! They will find you on the mountain, and you will be carried off by something or other that should make you very afraid.” Underline and circle the word should: “should make you very afraid.” So if you choose to heed that call, run down the mountain for the certainty of the protection that fear would offer you; you are back in the majesty of fear and all of its creations—“I am not safe, I must be trusted only by those who I will
know are safe, and I will not leave the certainty of my prison because at least I know where I stand.” You are given the illusion of freedom by fear, in most cases. It is a trickster. To be given the illusion by fear simply means you are told you are safe. When you build the bigger bomb, you are told you are safe. When you follow the rules, you are told you are safe. When you agree to exile those in your population who you believe could be harmful—and notice that we said the word “could,” not “were.” When someone is harmful to a populace, you will attend to them in love. And underline the word love, because to understand somebody in love responds to them as the ones able to change. They may be responded to as being able to change. Your verdict that anyone cannot change is heretical because you are God deciding for another that the act of will on your part, the act of intention on your part, is weaker than the truth of their being. “Why did you say ‘weaker’?” Paul is asking. “I am confused.” When you make a claim for another, “She will not change,” you are honoring your lower self and that is always the weaker and the lower way to decide. The infinite love that, in fact, is the Creator may redeem anyone and anything but not according to your journey, or your plan, or your presumption of what that must look like. There is not a man born who does not have a debt to pay from a prior incarnation or from the one that they inhabit, and the Christ that you are, the Divine as you, is, in fact, the redeemer. The knowing that who you are in consort with All That Is is the most powerful thing that you will ever know. So when you put someone away in anger and you tie yourselves to them, you do not redeem them, you lock yourself right in there with them in whatever you have claimed their punishment must be. Redemption is the ideal, but it has been vastly misunderstood by religion. You are redeemed by the renewing of your mind, yes, you are redeemed by the renewing of your heart, you are redeemed by the offering of the self to the Great Light of All That Is. You are redeemed in your willingness to know, and to serve, and to be. And you are redeemed when you say, “I am willing to know who I am,” because that is the gateway to the truth. The gateway to the truth, in fact, is all that is needed for you to go on the journey. You are up the mountain now, yes, not to the peak, and you justify yourselves still by looking at your creations, those things you have made and agreed to, and say, “So what? I will never change.”
At a certain level, there is an aspect of you that will never change and that is the Divine as you. Everything else is a pelt, an aspect of the material world that you are wearing or in consort with. We don’t have to validate this. This is you when you look in the mirror and see the finite self, the wrinkles on the skin, the sadness in the eyes, the bewildered look, “What have I become?” When you move beyond the shell to what lies beneath it, there is infinite love and infinite power, and we will say this: This power is stronger than any fear you could encounter. When you bypass fear, when you climb the mountain to the heights, you are going to be encountered by its creations. It’s very easy for you to say, “I went on that wonderful trip and I bypassed that country where they are always fighting.” In fact, you don’t bypass that country, you see that country as an aspect of you and you understand that your participation to the violence there is the violence within yourself, and as you understand that, you release the need for it because it doesn’t serve you. It is seductive, you see, when you see a fine brawl, to want to enter into the glory of the action, but the truth of who you are knows far better. Now if you are encountering something in your physical life, it is there for you to see and to respond to, to the degree that you are able to through your higher knowing. Not through the old actions that have been justified by culture, but through the choice to be, to be, to be. You cannot do a damn thing from anyplace else but being, and how you be is how you know who and what you are. The denial of truth will always be the action of fear. We have said in texts, “There is no lie that was ever told that was not told in fear,” but you believe this to be only your own lies. Any lie that has been said against another, or any population, is also being told in fear, and in the rising you do you may encounter these things for what they are. When you rise above a negative action and start agreeing to something new, you may lift many beyond what they have known, but you also may encounter the resistance to change, which is another way of saying they are trying to call you back from the new heights. We don’t make you saints, you see. This is not about leaving the world; it’s about being fully in the world as the True Self, and in honor, not in fear; in joy, not in anger; and in forgiveness, not punishment. The requirement now, at this stage of the journey, is to list the things that frighten you at this juncture. To make a simple list of what you have carried thus far that you believe can never be changed, to decide for the self that all things on
this list are creations of the small self and realize at this level of alignment they are not required. We will list some things for you: the fear of poverty, the fear of inaction, the fear of death. The things you can’t get past: the unforgiveness of this or that one, the fear of making a move that you know would benefit you, the fear of being loved, the fear of trusting, the fear of allowing someone in. Whatever it may be for you, we would like you to write it down. What you will write will be a list of beliefs that you are holding that you believe, in one way or another, you require; they have served you for some reason, and a reason you may never know. It’s not wrong that they are there, but we will honor you in this way: They cannot come up any higher. Now of your own will, you can do nothing with these things. If you could have, you would have done it a long time ago. Here is where mercy comes into play, and grace, and understanding that the alignment you hold is your gift from the Creator as well as your birthright. If you stand before us today, we your teachers, we who love you, we who shepherd you up the mountain, and you give us this list, we will carry it for you until it is no longer yours. We will carry it for you until you forget that it was your own list. And when we take it out of our hands, it will be gone. You must understand, friends, that these things that you hold in such high fear were never real to begin with at this level of freedom. Even the body, you see, in its way, is an illusion. It’s a temporary vehicle that you shepherd through. We will carry the list and we will love you as the list is disappeared. Paul is asking, “How can you do this for us?” Because we know the truth of who and what you are, because we do not lie, and we do not hold lies in our vibration. When you give a lie to one who cannot hold a lie, the lie is disappeared. The crown you receive at the top of the mountain is the crown of the Kingdom, but you cannot enter the Kingdom when you carry your bags of fear. We understand that at this height you have been through much, you have had a lifetime already of disappointment, or worry, or fear. So we offer you this: The Kingdom, you see, has always been present. You don’t have to be honored by entering. You are honored by being. You are the one that keeps you from it. You are the only one. So we are making it possible now to take you there in love and in the honor that we hold you in. There is no one who is reading this text who is not seen for who they are by those of us who scribe it. There is no one reading this text who is unworthy of
the climb they have made thus far, and there is no one unworthy, finally, finally, finally, of the love of the Creator, regardless of what you think. Now if you have given a list to us in your own way, we are already holding it. If you wish to do this as a ritual, that is up to you. You can imagine us before you with open hands carrying for you the very thing you place there. But if you place it in our hands, please don’t respond by tugging on our robes and saying, “Can I have it back for a little while? I think I need it still.” If you do that, it is yours again. We will say this for you: You are being witnessed by the light that is within you, and you are being witnessed by the light that surrounds you. You are being lit up by the truth of who you are and she will shepherd you forward as well. We will say this for Paul, who is questioning in the background: You are not carrying any of this. This is done by us in fullness and in full awareness of the charge we are making. We have the weight, you see, we have the light, we have the knowing to transmute fear. And if you allow us, Paul, we will transmute yours as well, but you have to be willing and you have to understand, as does the reader, that all fear ever gets you is more of the same. The reckoning you have to stand before us, just as you are, is the reckoning of the one who says, “Yes, I am. I am willing. I am willing. I am willing.” As you do this with us, we will turn away from you for one purpose. There is a higher climb still and we would like you to follow. The creations of mankind will be witnessed from the next plateau. The creations of mankind will need to be attended to by you, by all of you, as you traverse this next stage. If you can imagine standing on a high place where you can see all before you, you will be asked to witness all things man has known: all war, all famine, all fear, as well as joy and love and beauty. From this mountain peak you can see it all and, in your mind’s eye, we want you to say this with us: “I see all things with the eyes of the Christ. I see all manifestations of mankind with the eyes of the Christ. I see through history. I see through time. I see through the fog of indecision and confusion to witness the light that is in all things. I know who I am, I know what I am, I know how I serve. I am Word through all that I see before me. Word I am Word.”
You are the light, my friends, and from this high place you heal the world. God as you, the spirit of God as you, works through you to transform and to relieve all the darkness that has been in the awareness of Divine Love. There is no man on this plane who is unworthy. You are here, you are being witnessed, and as you are being witnessed by us, you will witness all men. As you witness all men, you witness the creations of man: the fear, the crime, whatever you would claim as outside of the light, you bring to the light. As you lift it in your vision, “I am Word through what I see before me. I see with the eyes of the Christ,” you become a beacon of light that heals the world. Your incarnation at this level of agreement is a guarantee, your freedom at this level of alignment is a guarantee, but you will not be moored by the things of this world if you are to be the light that shines on all. If you want to go back down the mountain, you may. It is your choice always. But you have come to heal the world, each and every one of you. Paul is saying, “What about the one who says, ‘I don’t want to heal the world. I just want to like myself a bit more. I just want to have a nice time in life.’” She is on the mountainside, too, doing exactly what we are describing. Her small self knows what she is in a small way and still seeks solace through small things, but her Divine Self hears our words and says, “Yes, I know I am here, I know I have come, I know I have risen in joy and in love in my right to be. I am here, I am here, I am here.” We are continuing in our dictation a little longer, and this is for Paul, who is wondering how long we will speak. As we have kept you so long on this plateau, we need to have a little feast with you, a little picnic, if you like. If you can also understand from this mountainside with the purview of all things that there are many things that may be claimed by you in light and in joy that could not be claimed in fear, we will invite you to claim them now. When you released the fear of poverty you gave yourself permission to receive the abundance of the universe from All That Is. When you have said, “I am willing to be loved,” you may call the lover to you. You have the right, you see, to benefit from the creations on this plane. You don’t have to become attached to them. But if you can imagine that the picnic that you are about to enjoy is goodness and what may be known to you at this level of vibration, we ask you to say “yes,” to begin to receive the feast that would be put before you in
love, in laughter, in respect for who and what you are, for how far you have come, and what you may now claim. We will say these words with you: “We see the ones before us enjoying the bounty of their world. We see the ones before us receiving the gifts of the Kingdom. We see the ones before us saying ‘yes’ to what they may know and receive at this level of vibration. And we see the ones before us as loved, as loved, as loved, and as knowing that they are loved. I am Word through the ones before me. I am Word through this intention. Word I am Word.” We will say thank you for the day, for the fine dictation, for the receptivity of the channel, for the patience of Victoria. And as we go on in the next several days, we intend to complete our work here for this volume. We thank you for your presence. Stop now, please. Period, period, period.
Day Twenty-five We teach everybody today, not just the man in the chair, what it means to be human. What it means to be human is in the fullness of your expression. All of the emotional things that you would attach meaning to are actually here to participate in your education. You come for an education in human form, to delight in the things of the world and to witness the creations of man. We want you to understand that never once do we denounce your humanity in this teaching. We elevate it, and meld it, and lift it to the light that it is from. We are bringing you upward, not at the cost of your humanity, but to the salvation of it. The times you live in, that you have all created, incur a feeling of fear for one reason: You have chosen, in all ways, to participate in systems of control that limit mankind’s destiny. And it is very challenging not to notice these things if you have eyes, and ears, and ways of understanding that you are taught every day that you stand at a juncture of the end of times. We will celebrate you in these words: You are here, and you are here now, and you will be here in one form or another throughout time. But humanity’s destiny
supersedes the small self and the needs of the small self to be happy, to be happy in her old ways. So we come now with this choice: to show you who you are so you may know and lift your world, finally, from its historical creations of fear. War is nothing but fear, and control, you see, is an act of fear. As you all rise, one being, one country, one species, one being to your Whole Selves, you create the love through the body you are in. You are the light that shines upon the darkness and you create the Kingdom through your own eyes. You bring it into being through your awareness of it. The Christ as you has the eyes to see and does, and does, and does. Here we go: “At this time in my life after many years of wrong assumption, I make a new claim for me and my fellow man, that we will lift together in an awareness of our divinity, that we will rise together in the face of war, that we will love one another in the face of cruelty. We will all decide, each and every one of us, to come forward to claim the Kingdom that is here, and we will share in the bounty of the light that is brought forth through this decree: We are here! We are here! We are here!” You have been chosen, you see, through your own intention to be liberated. You have agreed through your own recognition of your divinity to welcome others, and you have decided through the lives you will now lead to be an emissary of the truth. Underline the word truth. You are the truth, and the way, and the light, all men are, as they know themselves in their truth. Never once for a moment believe that we speak of the small self this way. The small self cannot comprehend these words. To be the way means to be holding the vibration of the Divine Light as an emissary who will challenge the darkness by her very presence. To be the truth is the resounding song of your vibration lifted to fullness in vibration of love, the truth of who you are, I am, I am, I am. The light is here as you say “yes” and agree to be the one who has come for the benefit of all. We are here with you now walking beside you, honoring you as you say “yes” to the call you have answered. Each one of you here has agreed to challenge fear. Each one of you here has agreed to deny it. And each one of you here has been lifted through her claim of freedom. We know who you are, and as we say “yes” to your calling, we will offer you these words: There is no one among you who will be left. We assure you of this.
Those of you who read these words, those of you who may hear this voice, those of you who agree to the council of the True Self will be called forward in her might, in her glory, and in her love as she can and as she agrees. We do not drag you, we make the way clear for you to step forward as you are. The light you are illumines the path, and the path itself is called forward to you as you walk it. The days of wondering why you were born have ended. The days of crying out for aid have ended. And the days of being a fool in the denial of your own worth and the worth of your fellows are gone as well. You stand before us today in honor. You stand before us today in beauty and you stand before us today in our own awareness of your challenges, what you have known yourselves through and as. We escort you now to the peak of the mountaintop. We surround you each, one on each side, to assure your steps are being made in fullness and in safety. We agree to you as you rise up to this peak that it is safe to be here and, in fact, so safe that you would choose it over anything below. At the top of the mountain you stand on is a burning light, and a vibrant light in its fullness that is the truth of all things. On this mountaintop is a bright light that holds the answers to all questions and knows its name, “I Am That I Am.” And as you step before it, you allow yourself to be consumed by it and go into union with the Divine. “You are here. You are here. You are here.” As you are, allow yourself to be received in union with the true light of Christ, the true I Am, the great I Am, the one who knows, who is, and will always be. We support you now as you disengage from our watch and bring yourself into the freedom of God itself. “You are here, you are here, you are here.” The love that you hold now is within your heart, and it is the love of the Creator. The eyes that you see through are the eyes that see the light in all things, and will always be so. And the heart that you have that beats inside you beats in the memory of your creation, “I am here, I am here, I am here.” The wisdom you require to encounter yourself from this day forward is encoded in your vibration through this encounter so you may never be in
ignorance again of your own Divine worth. And the light that you are will be witnessed as you claim it. “I know who I am, what I am, how I serve.” As we continue on this journey with you, in our future texts we are going to teach you things that you could not know prior to this reunion with the light you are, and prior to your engagement with the truth of all. The wisdom of the ages, you see, is ever present. It allows you entry and access as you understand your own true nature. And you will be supported, we say, in your honor, in your freedom, in your worth, in your love, in your choice to be as you traverse the landscape that you have now entered. The world, as you know it, has ended. And we will say this intentionally: The new world that is born as you, in your truth, will support all in their lifting. You are the vibration, the way, and the knowing that you require will be brought to you as you require it. Here we go: “On this day I agree to be in service, fully realized in my knowing of my Divine Nature. And as I say ‘yes,’ I am handed a paper that I will hold to my heart. And on this paper lies the instructions that I will require to honor and to be through, as I require it. I understand that by holding the paper to my heart I accept the symbol of my own knowing of my heart’s worth, and motive, and agreement for realization. And I support myself in this engagement as I need it, and as I will need it to be called forward in service.” We will listen to you now and we will honor the questions you may hold as you ask us. The light that you are is a freedom. It is not bound by time. The consciousness you are has its freedom and is not bound by time. And the questions that you may ask as you go forward in your journey will be heard and answered in ways that may surprise you. We will listen to you now as Paul has a question. “What of this teaching,” he says, “appeals to the lower nature? I am wary of any teaching that could appeal to lower nature or tell us we are special.” Understand, friends, as you are this frequency, as you have been reunited, you are manifested well above that level of choice. You have agreed in fullness to become who you are in your awareness of union, and that is the promise of this text. The small cannot wave a flag to this elect being. She knows who she is and she will not be tampered with. So understand, if you would, that the Divine as
you holds all the safeguards to allow herself her rule. The Divine as you understands the small self well, but she runs the show now as she says “yes” and as you have agreed to your union. He has another question and we will take it. “What becomes of us now? What does it mean to be this? What are we?” You are the Divine Self as you. You have always been this. You have been unmasked, in some ways, in your agreement to the top of the mountain peak. You make yourself visible, yes, to the high level of vibration that can only exist there, and visible to those below you so that they may achieve their own ascension. Here you are on this day, again questioning, “What does this make me? Now what do I do?” Please understand, friend, that those are the questions of the small self. The small self questions; the Divine knows. Go into agreement now, “I know, I know, I know,” and be still. Your answers will come. The journey is not ended, you see. If there were only one mountain to climb, it would be a lonely plane. You have ascended to a level of vibration through your encounter with us and these words that will serve you well, but you don’t get to sit back and say, “Well, I did it, what’s the next thing to do?” You say, “Yes, I am here,” and you offer yourself in service to the good of the whole. We remember you as you were, as you are, as you will be, and we know who you are in truth at all levels of alignment. There is no ceiling, you see, the mountaintop goes on and on in its own way. As you recover and reclaim your union, you are led by it. We will stop this dictation for the day and we will say to Paul and Victoria, we will close soon. We will offer chapter titles as we are ready and we will prepare this text in perfect ways for the reader to receive it. Please let us do the work that is required. We remind you of the authorship of this book. It is by those of us who claim themselves as “I Am.” “We are here, we are here, we are here.” We will thank you both, and stop now, please.
Day Twenty-six
We are here, we are here, we are here, and we sing your song for you on this fine day when all things are possible. Get ready, my friends, to reencounter yourselves in your lives. Every day is an opportunity to remember yourselves and to claim victory over the purview of the small self. The Divine as you has chosen to incarnate as you, and it is the Divine Self who must be called on to show you the way. You are here not only for your own benefit, but for all of those you may meet and may never meet, and on and on and on and on. We sing your song for you, “You are here.” Now as we resume this teaching, we want to give you a word of caution about what you must not do at this level of engagement. You must not create opportunities to set up yourself as special, or as unique, or as having been gifted with something from a higher realm. In fact, all men are endowed with this light. You simply came to the forefront to acknowledge the self in her divinity. The Divine Self, who knows who he is, is never singled out for this because the true light that he is is a humble light. It shines in great brightness for the benefit of others, not to shine for himself. So as we understand your needs for an ongoing teaching that will support you in your lives, we will agree to continue to teach you. What happens next will be a very simple action on your part and for the benefit of your own learning. We would like you to begin to ask questions of the text in the ethers. Write them down, if you like, but the mental construct of the questions will become the vehicle for our next volume. We wish to show you that your creations on this plane can be transformed to a higher way, and we anticipate a vehicle that will move you, and all men, outside of small creations. As we have taught you, a creation is a thing brought into form, and what was brought into form in fear will have to be re-created as the vehicle you are rises in awareness. So as we continue on in these teachings, we align to you as our students to show you what you need as you require us to hear you and your questions. As we complete this volume, we want to take a moment and attend to the needs of the man who sits in the chair who says, “What an arduous journey this one was.” What is not very arduous is sitting in a chair and hearing the words and repeating them. What is a challenge is leaving a life you have known and welcoming a new one in the face of change. What is a challenge for you will be the challenge for the readers of this text, who decide for themselves that this is so. “This is so” means you are feeling your way through the next life as the Divine Self, and the regard you hold to the small self who has been your
benefactor in the small kingdom he rules will be seen and moved beyond as you attend to the life before you that you have claimed in your awareness of your worth. Each man, you see, is a king of his kingdom, a queen, if you prefer, of her kingdom. But the Kingdom is the mind, and the manifestations of the mind are always out-pictured before you. The Divine as you lives in a high place, calls to be those things that she requires to know herself through, and claims the Kingdom of the Most High in all she sees. You are the one who chooses. You always have been. The road before you still, the road before each one of you, is not a rocky climb. The road before you unfolds as you take each step forward in consort with your truth. Understand this, friends: When you are in truth, you are immune to what you would call evil, and what we mean by this is the lower nature that would seek to harm. Paul is alarmed by the use of the word, so we will explain it again. There is high vibration and low vibration. Everything is born in intent. The vibration you hold now is in consort with high vibration and calls those things to you that she requires to know herself through. At the peak you stand on where there is truth, you cannot be in consort with the low nature, and if you wish to say that is evil, we suppose you can. Here we go: “I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve. And as I stand on this mountaintop, I lay claim to the Kingdom before me. And as I agree to my new life, I say ‘yes’ to all that will come to me. I align to my worth. I align to all that I know to be true. And the freedom I hold as the one in choice brings me forward each day to my destiny. As I say “yes” to this teaching, as I lay claim to the Kingdom, I support myself in the knowing that I have that my birthright has been made in form. I know who I am. I know what I am. I am here.” We sing your song for you, as we said. And as we conclude this text, we wish to honor you each with this benediction: The road before you is not a long road. It is born in the infinite now. As you stand before us, as you stand before your fellows, you are witnessed as the Divine Beings you truly are. We say “yes” to all that will come. We say “yes” to all you may know. And as we say “yes,” we light the light that is the only true light and you, as one,
illumine your world. You are here, you are here, you are here. We will say thank you now, and we will say good-bye until we resume our teaching. We are pleased for your presence. We are Word. Period, period, period. Stop now, please.
EPILOGUE Day Twenty-seven
W
e will say this: The text has been completed. The teaching is not completed, and any feeling you have, Paul, about an incomplete text is because there is vastly more information to come through, and very quickly. The requirement for you is to remain available as we teach, and we intend to teach as you allow us to work through you in classrooms, in seminars, in texts. At any opportunity you allow us, we will be there to teach, and for the primary reason that the students are receiving not only the information but the attunements to the vibration we call to them for the good of all. As each man awakens, as each man comes forward to hold his own light, the vibration of this plane is transformed and the illumination of each one of you calls forward the illumination of a thousand more. The work we do under this name is pronounced “I Am Word,” but you may call the light anything you please. The distinctions one makes in personality are always born in the personality self. At a certain level it does not matter whether you call it anything at all. The sound of us is a tone, a vibration, a claim, a song that you know because it is your song as well. The vibration we hold is your own at its high octave. He is asking, “High or highest?” We took you up to a mountaintop; please get used to the air. Learn what it’s like to exist there for a period of time and then look up, look up to the sky, and we will be there smiling down and extending a hand to reach you up to the next level of instruction that may be gifted to you.
Each one of you, with this book in hand, is saying, “Okay, did I do it right?” That is your old self questioning it. The Divine as you, if you allow her, will agree that you are always here and the knowing of this, “I am here,” the claim of mastery in your essence, can never be wrong. We will say this for Paul: You may call this an epilogue or a postscript, but we have some instruction for you: The next six months for you, Paul, will be about integration of the teaching that has come forth and you will be asked to live with it, to honor it, to be as it, as you allow yourself to be. The readers themselves will have a very similar process of integration if, in fact, they work with the teaching and the instruction as laid out. They will integrate as well at the level that is appropriate for them at the level of consciousness that they have attained. The life you live will be transformed, yes, but don’t always expect it to look like you think it should. The “should” is always, as we have said, the small self’s indicator of a construct in expectation. The next book, which we will call “the book of knowing who you are”—and that’s the name for right now, not the name on the title—will be gifted to you within the year. So please be prepared to work, to sit, and to say, “Yes, here we go! Here we go! Here we go! Back up the mountain.” Here we are with you now once again in honor of your presence. Thank you both for your attention to these words. The reader is well aware of our thanks to her. Period, period, period. Stop now, please.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Tim Chambers, Beth Grossman, Mitch Horowitz, Amy Hughes, Jeffrey J. Kripal and the Esalen Institute, Jeannette Meek, Victoria Nelson, Noah Perabo, Amy Perry, Jonny Podell, Michael Purcell, Reality Sandwich, and Alison StormPodell.
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Paul Selig was born in New York City. He attended New York University and received his master’s degree from Yale. A spiritual experience in 1987 left him clairvoyant. He is considered to be one of the foremost contributors to the field of channeled literature working today. Paul offers channeled workshops internationally and teaches regularly at the Esalen Institute, the Kripalu Center, and the Omega Institute. He is the former director of the MFA in Creative Writing Program at Goddard College and served on the faculty of New York University for more than twenty-five years. He maintains a practice as an intuitive in New York City. Information on public workshops, live-streamed seminars, and private readings can be found at www.paulselig.com.
* I Am the Word, The Book of Love and Creation, and The Book of Knowing and Worth.
* Paul is referring to his practice as a psychic.
* This section was delivered during a live-streamed seminar.
* Paul was gesturing here.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* Paul was gesturing.
* The questions are from seminar participants.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* The Guides are referring to Paul, who was gesturing.
* This section was delivered during a live-streamed seminar.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* This section was delivered during a live-streamed seminar.
* The Guides are referring to Paul.
* This section was delivered during a live-streamed seminar.
Looking for more? Visit Penguin.com for more about this author and a complete list of their books. Discover your next great read!